Raytheon Anschuetz High Seas 9RAN-SUR-25U Marine Radar User Manual Titel

Raytheon Anschuetz GmbH High Seas Products Marine Radar Titel

9RAN SUR 25U User Manual PDF Download & Text

Service Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1200537
Application ID	CdSWJlMdH30eZ129CBiFAw==
Document Description	Service Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	421.35kB (5266862 bits)
Date Submitted	2009-11-17 00:00:00
Date Available	2009-11-17 00:00:00
Creation Date	2009-09-15 11:57:03
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 9.0.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2009-09-16 11:13:33
Document Title	Titel
Document Creator	PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Document Author:	hmayer

Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Postfach 1166
D -- 24100 Kiel
Germany
Tel +49--4 31--30 19--0
Fax +49--4 31--30 19--501
Email Service@raykiel.com
www.raytheon--anschuetz.com
NSC 25/34 Radar
Typ 900--025...027
NSC Chartradar
Typ 950--033...035
WIDE SCREEN (16:10)
Service and Installation Manual
3749DOC020302
Edition: 21.AUG.2009
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage, Verwertung und
Mitteilung ihres Inhaltes nicht gestattet, soweit nicht ausdrücklich
zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz.
Copying of this document, and giving it to others and the use or
communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden without express
authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages.
Toute communication ou reproduction de ce document, toute
exploitation ou communication de son contenu sont interdites, sauf
autorisation expresse. Tout manquement à cette règle est illicite et
expose son auteur au versement de dommages et intérêts.
Sin nuestra expresa autorización, queda terminantemente prohibida la
reproducción total o parcial de este documento, así como su uso
indebido y/o su exhibición o comunicación a terceros. De los infractores
se exigirá el correspondiente resarcimiento de daños y perjuicios.
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Safety Regulations
IMPORTANT WARNINGS AND SAFETY INFORMATIONS
This Radar is an aid to navigation. Its accuracy can be affected by
many factors such as equipment defects, environmental conditions, or
improper operation. It is the user’s responsibility to exercise common
prudence and navigational judgement at all times.
ATTENTION
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to IEC 60936, IEC 60872 and
IEC 60945.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not properly installed and used in accordance with the instructions, this equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his own expense.
The used sensor equipment pursuant to IEC 61162.
Using this NSC Radar as High Speed Radar the Gyro Sensor must be a High
Speed Gyro Sensor as well.
Edition: 1
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Safety Regulations
SAFETY REGULATION
Warning!
Caution during maintenance and repairs: Avoid contact with
live electrical circuits!
All relevant safety regulations such as, e.g. VDE, VGB4,
OSHA 1919 and other relevant safety standards must be ob
served.
Caution!
Maintenance and repairs must only be carried out by trained
and qualified personal with knowledge of the national safety
regulations for electrical devices.
Observe handling regulations!
Electrostatic sensitive components.
Removal or insertion of a subgroup or printed wiring board
with live voltage can lead to severe damage.
Never insert fuses with other values than those stipulated!
3749DOC020302
Caution!
If acting without authority any modifications the NSC 25 / 34
can be affects the functionality and lose the GUARANTY.
II
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Safety Regulations
SAFETY HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING
CAUTION
HIGH VOLTAGE IS USED IN THE OPERATION OF THIS
EQUIPMENT.
DEATH ON CONTACT MAY RESULT IF PERSONNEL FAIL
TO OBSERVE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
NEVER WORK ON ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT UNLESS
THERE IS ANOTHER PERSON NEARBY WHO IS FAMILIAR WITH THE OPERATIONAL HAZARDS OF THE
HIGH VOLTAGE
EQUIPMENT AND WHO IS COMPETENT IN ADMINISTERING FIRST AID. WHEN THE TECHNICIAN IS AIDED
BY OPERATORS, HE MUST WARN THEM ABOUT DANGEROUS AREAS. WHENEVER POSSIBLE, THE POWER
SUPPLY TO THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE SHUT OFF BEFORE BEGINNING WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT. TAKE
PARTICULAR CARE TO GROUND EVERY CAPACITOR
LIKELY TO HOLD A DANGEROUS POTENTIAL. WHEN
WORKING INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT, AFTER THE
POWER HAS BEEN TURNED OFF, ALWAYS GROUND
EVERY PART BEFORE TOUCHING IT. BE CAREFUL NOT
TO CONTACT HIGH--VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS OR 115,
230 VOLT AC INPUT CONNECTIONS WHEN INSTALLING
OR OPERATING THIS EQUIPMENT. WHENEVER THE
NATURE OF THE OPERATION PERMITS, KEEP ONE
HAND AWAY FROM THE EQUIPMENT TO REDUCE THE
HAZARD OF CURRENT FLOWING THROUGH VITAL ORGANS OF THE BODY.
EXTREMELY DANGEROUS POTENTIALS GREATER
THAN 200 VOLTS EXIST IN SOME OF THE UNITS COVERED IN THIS MANUAL.
POTENTIALS LESS THAN 200 VOLTS MAY CAUSE
DEATH UNDER CERTAIN CONDITIONS. REASONABLE
PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN AT ALL TIMES.
NOTICE: CALL FOR HELP FIRST, THEN ATTEND THE
CASUALTY IMMEDIATELY.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
III
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Safety Regulations
HIGH VOLTAGE
There is absolutely no danger in handling the external controls of the radar
while the radar is in operation. However, in the radar‘s interior, are high
voltages which are fatally dangerous to anyone carelessly handling interior
components. Be absolutely sure that the radar power switch or the radar
system is switched is OFF before performing repair work or maintenance .
Furthermore, even when the radar power switch or the radar system is turned
OFF, a high voltage remains in certain parts of the radar circuits. In particular,
be careful of the magnetron heater circuit, cathode--ray tube anode circuit,
etc.. Before touching any part of the voltage sections, use a length of wire with
one end fully grounded or an insulated screwdriver to ground all high voltage
sections in order to discharge the residual charges and ensure that no charges
remain. In any case, the most dangerous thing to do is to touch any part of the
high voltage sections without making sure that the radar power switch or the
radar system is switched OFF.
ATTENTION
Exercise care when approaching a rotating antenna. Be sure to turn OFF the
radar power switch or the radar system before performing maintenance or
inspection of the antenna. Also, make sure that the area around the antenna is
clear of personnel and equipment when turning ON the radar power supply.
3749DOC020302
IV
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Safety Regulations
Radiation Hazard
CAUTION
UNDER NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS, THE ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY EMITTED BY THIS RADAR OPERATION IS SAFELY BELOW GOVERNMENT EXPOSURE MAXIMUM STANDARDS.
1. WHEN AT DOCK SIDE OR CLOSE TO OTHER
VESSELS, THE TRANSMITTER SHOULD ONLY BE
OPERATED WHEN THE ANTENNA IS ROTATING.
2. THE RADAR SYSTEM SHOULD BE TURNED OFF
BEFORE APPROACHING WITHIN 6 FEET OF THE
ANTENNA FOR X--BAND AND 15 FEET FOR S--BAND.
3. THE ANTENNA SHOULD NOT BE RELOCATED OR
REPOSITIONED ON THE VESSEL WITHOUT
CONSULTING THE RAYTHEON MARINE COMPANY
SERVICE ORGANIZATION OR AN AUTHORIZIED
DEALER.
MICROWAVE RADIATION
A short exposure to the microwaves radiated by the radar antenna is harmless-however, avoid prolonged exposure to the microwaves.
Never look directly into the wave guide while checking transceiver operation
since microwaves are especially harmful to the eyes.
The radiation of microwaves can be checked with a neon tube.
The neon tube will glow in the presence of microwaves.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Safety Regulations
3749DOC020302
VI
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 -- 1
1.1
UNPACKING AN INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1
Major Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 -- 3
1 -- 3
1.1.2
1.2
Equipment Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 -- 5
PLANNING AND SITE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 -- 6
1.2.1
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1.1 Safe Distances to Standard--Magnetic and Steering--Magnetic Compass . . . . . .
1.2.1.2 TFT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1.3 Processor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1.4 Antenna Pedestal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1.5 MTR Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-------
1.2.2
Radar Performance depends on the mounting place of the Antennas . . . . . . . . . .
1 -- 11
1.2.3
Processor Unit / Monitor Site Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 -- 12
1.2.4
NSC Radar for Special Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.4.1 Explosion Proof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 -- 12
1 -- 12
1.3
SYSTEM CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 -- 13
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 -- 14
EQUIPMENT PHYSICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 1
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 2
2.1.1
Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 2
2.1.2
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 3
2.1.3
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 4
1.3.1
2.1
2.1.4
Compass Safe Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4.1 Safe Distance Magnetic Compass versus Monitor and Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4.2 Safe Distance Magnetic Compass versus Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4.3 Safe Distance Magnetic Compass versus MTR Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4.4 Safe Distance Magnetic Compass versus MTR Down Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
------
PROCESSOR, MONITOR AND INTERSWITCH UNIT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 7
2.2.1
General Installation--hints for the NSC--Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 7
2.2.2
NSC Monitor used as Table Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 9
2.2.3
NSC Monitor used as Deckstand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 10
Edition: 21.AUG.2009
VII
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Table of Contents
2.2.4
NSC Interswitch Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 11
2.2.5
NSC Ethernet Modul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 11
NSC MTR UP/PEDESTAL AND MTR DOWN INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 12
2.3.1
Mounting Structure Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 12
2.3.2
Mounting and Service Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 12
2.3
2.3.3
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3.1 NSC MTR Up/Pedestal Hoisting and Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3.2 NSC MTR Up/Pedestal Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3.3 MTR Up/Pedestal Oil Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-----
14
15
17
18
2.3.4
Antenna Array Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4.1 X--Band Array Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4.2 8ft X--Band LPR--A25 Array Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4.3 12ft S--Band Array Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4.4 12ft S--Band LPR--A1 Array Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
------
19
19
21
22
25
2.3.5
MTR Down Physikal Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.5.1 MTR Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 29
2 -- 29
2.4
2.4.1
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION / CONNECTION NSC MTR AND PEDESTAL . . . . .
2 -- 30
General Information concerning on--board wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 31
2.4.2
Transmission Line Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.1 Recommended Types of X--Band Transmission Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.2 Elliptical Waveguide Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.3 Fabrication of Rigid Waveguide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.4 Rigid Waveguide Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.5 Running the Waveguide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.6 Cutting the Waveguide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.7 Waveguide Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.8 Waveguide Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.9 Waveguide Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.10 Waveguide Penetration Gland Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.11 X--Band MTR Waveguide Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.12 NSC S--Band Transmission Line Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3
MTR Up/Pedestal Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3.1 System Interconnection Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 43
2 -- 43
2.4.4
MTR Down Physicel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4.1 MTR Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4.2 MTR Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 44
2 -- 44
2 -- 44
3749DOC020302
VIII
--------------
31
34
34
36
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
40
42
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Table of Contents
2.5
NSC CAN-- BUS (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 45
2.5.1
CAN-- Bus Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 46
2.5.2
Connecting the CAN bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 47
SETUP AND LINKING (REFERING X--BAND 7ft., 8ft LPR--A25, 9ft.,
AND S--BAND 12 ft., 12ft LPR--A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 49
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 49
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
MTR Up/Down Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2.1 MTR Up/Down Input Power Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2.2 MTR Up/Down Pedestal Motor Power Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2.3 MTR Up/Down Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.3
Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 59
2.6.4
Initial Turn On NSC MTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 59
MTR OPERATION (REFERING X--BAND 7ft., 8ft. LPR--A25, 9ft.,
AND S--BAND 12ft., 12ft. LPR--A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 60
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 60
2.8
10kW X--BAND PEDESTAL WITH 6ft. ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.1
Pedestal (mechanical installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.1.1 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 61
2 -- 61
2 -- 62
2.7
2.7.1
-----
2.8.2
X--Band Pedestal with 6 ft. Antenna (electrical installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2.1 Cable Setting--up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2.2 Connection of pedestal terminal boards (J8, J9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2.3 Signals Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.3
Putting into Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.3.1 Operation X--Band Pedestal with 6 ft Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 70
2 -- 70
2.9
-----
50
50
51
56
63
63
67
68
PERFORMANCE MONITOR UNIT FOR X--BAND (7ft., 8ft, 9ft..) AND S--BAND
(12ft..) ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 71
PMU Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 72
PERFORMANCE MONITOR FOR 6ft. ANTENNA (PM30--02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 75
2.10.1
Configuration of the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 76
2.10.2
General Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 76
2.10.3
Mechanical Installation of Performance Monitor (PM30--02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 78
2.10.4
Electrical Installation of Performance Monitor (PM30--02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 80
2.9.1
2.10
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
IX
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Table of Contents
2.11
NSC INTERSWITCH UNIT (ISU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 82
2.11.1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 82
2.11.2
Setting up the NSC Interswitch Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 83
2.11.2.1 Aids to Troubleshooting the NSC Interswitch Unit (ISU) and the
Transceiver Control Module (TCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 -- 86
SETUP, TEST AND CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 1
3.1
SYSTEM SETUP AND TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 2
3.2
START OF SYSTEM SETUP AND TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 3
3.3
THE CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 6
3.3.1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 6
3.3.2
Before starting the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 7
CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 9
Project Planning (Info and Examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 9
3.4.2
Using Interswitch in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2.1 Interswitch Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 13
3 -- 15
3.4.3
Transceiver Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 16
3.4.4
Video Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 22
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.5
Mk2 pedestals under use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5.1 Zero Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5.2 Antenna Azimuth Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5.3 Tuning Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5.4 Noise Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5.5 Sector Blanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5.6 PMU Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5.7 PMU Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5.8 Operating Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5.9 Finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-----------
24
27
29
33
34
35
36
40
41
42
3.5
CONFIGURATION 2.VIDEO SET/TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 43
3.6
CONFIGURATION -- 3.USER PREFS. -- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 44
User Prefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 44
CONFIGURATION -- 4.COM--PORTS -- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 49
3.6.1
3.7
3749DOC020302
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Table of Contents
3.7.1
COM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 49
3.7.2
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 53
3.7.3
Configuration INPUT (COM ....) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 53
3.7.4
Configuration OUTPUT (COM ....) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 55
CONFIGURATION -- 6.ETHERNET -- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 57
3.8.1
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 57
3.8.2
Network configuration for NSC PC’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 58
3.8.3
AIS Input to Radar using Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 61
3.8.4
AIS to Ethernet Output from Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 62
CONFIGURATION 5. DEFAULTS / TESTS / SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 63
Defaults / Tests / Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 64
3.10
SERVICE EXPORT/IMPORT RADAR DISPLAY CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 68
3.11
VOYAGE DATA RECORDER INTERFACE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 70
3.12
COM PORT (Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 72
3.13
CONFIGURATION AIS SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 74
AIS configuration via serial Com Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 74
CONFIG RMG CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 77
Multifunctional Console MFC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 -- 81
SERVICE AND ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 1
PEDESTAL -- X--BAND AND S--BAND -- MTR UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 1
4.1.1
PCB Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1.1 Coarse Tune Adjustment (Controller PCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1.2 Modulator PCB (Mag I) Adjustment for X--Band and S--Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 1
4 -- 1
4 -- 4
4.1.2
X/S--Band MTR Up Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 7
4.1.3
X/S--Band Connector Bracket (A9), 1j, Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 8
4.1.4
X/S--Band Contactor Bracket (A9), 3Ø, Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 10
3.8
3.9
3.9.1
3.13.1
3.14
3.14.1
4.1
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
XI
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Table of Contents
4.1.5
Power I/O PCB (A1) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 11
4.1.6
Encoder Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 12
4.1.7
AC Motor or Belt Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 13
4.1.8
X--Band RF Assembly Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.8.1 HV Binding Post Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 14
4 -- 14
4.1.9
Magnetron or Front--End Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.9.1 Removal of LNFE SUB ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 15
4 -- 17
4.1.10
4 -- 18
RF Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.11 S--Band MTR Up RF Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.11.1 Magnetron (V1) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.11.2 LNFE/ IF Amp (A4) Assembly and TR Limiter (A6) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.11.3 Circulator (A7) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.12
X--Band MTR Up Worm Gear Shaft Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 24
4.1.13
S--Band MTR Up Worm Gear Shaft Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 26
4.1.14
Motor Capacitors A10 C1 and A10 C2 Removal (Single Phase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 28
4.1.15
Fan Wheel, Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 29
4.1.16
X/S--Band MTR Up Modulator PCB Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 30
4.1.17
Modulator MOSFET (A2Q13) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 32
4.1.18
X/S--Band Power Converter (A2A2) Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 34
4.1.19
X/S--Band Controller (A3) PCB Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 35
4.1.20 Antenna Array Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.20.1 X--Band Antenna Array Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.20.2 S--Band Antenna Array Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 36
4 -- 36
4 -- 36
4.1.21 T--Bar and Drive Shaft Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.21.1 X--Band MTR Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.21.2 S--Band MTR Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 38
4 -- 38
4 -- 39
4.1.22 Rotary Joint Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.22.1 X--Band MTR Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.22.2 X--Band MTR Up Rotary Joint Shimming (For Field Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.22.3 S--Band MTR Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.23
Performance Monitor Unit (PMU) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 45
10kW PEDESTAL -- X--BAND (6 ft.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 46
4.2
3749DOC020302
XII
-----
-----
20
20
21
22
40
40
41
42
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Table of Contents
4.2.1
Pedestal overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 46
4.2.2
Pedestal Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.1 ACP--30020 motor control board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.2 MDL--301 modulator board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.3 Magnetron replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.4 Front--end replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.5 Antenna Motor Group replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.6 RTM Plate replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.7 Circulator replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.8 Limiter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.9 Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.10 IFB--200 receiver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.11 HLT--11000 HL board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.12 Antenna Rotation Motor replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.13 HLT--12000 encoder board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.14 Brushes replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3
6 Foot X--Band Array replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 63
4.2.4
Interconnecting Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 64
XCVR Troubleshooting Guide (X--Band, S--Band) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 -- 65
4.3
4.3.1
LED’s and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1.1 MTR Power and I/O PCB LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1.2 MTR Controller PCB LED and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1.3 MTR Modulator PCB LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
----------------
-----
48
48
49
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
69
69
70
72
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 1
5.2
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE -- X--BAND AND S--BAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1.1 Cleaning (Yearly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1.2 Inspection (Yearly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-----
5.2.2
X--Band Pedestal Lubrication (Yearly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 5
5.2.3
S--Band Pedestal Lubrication (Yearly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 6
5.2.4
X/S--Band Pedestal Lubricant Draining (30 Months) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 7
5.2.5
Drive System Inspection (Yearly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 9
5.2.6
Access Cover Gasket Inspection (Yearly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 9
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 10kW -- X--BAND 6ft. SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 10
5.3
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
XIII
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Table of Contents
5.3.1
Maintenance Pre--condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 10
5.3.2
List Instrumentation and Tools for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 11
5.3.3
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 11
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE -- PROCESSOR UNIT -- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 13
5.4.1
Cleaning the NSC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 13
5.4.2
Changing the air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 13
5.5
Processor Unit Removing and Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 14
5.6
Chartradar and C--MAP eToken replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 18
5.6.1
C--MAP License Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 19
5.6.2
C--MAP eToken C--Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 20
SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 23
Note on Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 -- 23
5.4
5.7
5.7.1
Annex:
(TT = Table Top, HT= Hatteland, DS = Deckstand, TCU = Transceiver Control Unit)
NSC Processor --Input/Output Configuration -Installation Protocol
Maintenance Plan for Radar and Chartradar NSC
Dimensional Drawings:
Monitors, Processor or Interswitch
NSC 25 TFT--TT
Monitor NSC 34 TFT
NSC 34 TFT--DS
NSC 25 TFT--DS
Conrac 16:10 display
Transceiver Control Unit
NSC Interswitch
Radar Connection Module NSC
3749DOC020302
XIV
900--011.HP015
900--021.HP005
900--027.HP005
900--026.HP005
Outline Drawing 6026SD
900--019.HP005
900--020.HP005
950--012.HP005
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Table of Contents
Radar Operator Panel
Trackball 50mm
NSC Remote Panel
NSC Ethernet Modul
948--002.HP005
948--001.HP045
948--007.HP005
948--009.HP005
Pedestals and Transceiver
X--Band Pedestal (7, 9, 12 feet)
X--Band Pedestal (8 feet, LPR--A25)
X--Band Pedestal SU 70--10NR (6 feet)
S--Band Pedestal (12 feet)
S--Band Pedestal (12 feet, LPR--A1)
MK2 MTR Down Transceiver
Transformer Box
NSC Transceiver Control Unit
Connection Diagrams:
Connection Diagram
Monitor NSC 25 Chart
NSC 25 Radar
NSC 34 Radar
NSC Chart
NSC Black Box Chart
NSC Black Box Radar
G624611
148--500.HP086
NB99--HP0048
G624646
148--500.HP087
G624721
116--087.HP005
900--019.HP014
950--012.HP013
900--026.HP010
900--026.HP011
900--027.HP011
900--027.HP010
900--013.HP020
900--013.HP021
MFC Connection Diagrams see NSC ECDIS SERVICE MANUAL DOC032
(950--012.HP023, 950--012.HP024, 950--012.HP030)
Edition: 30.JUL.2009
XV
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Table of Contents
3749DOC020302
XVI
Edition: 30.JUL.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
INTRODUCTION
This manual contains the procedures for preparing the installation site,
installation, setup and alignment of NSC radar components.
NSC Radar Components
NSC 25/34 (inclusive Mounting Kit)
NSC means “Nautoscan” . 25/34 means Monitor PPI Diagonal of 250mm
and 340mm.
NSC 25/34 are designed as Deckstand (DS) or as Table Top (TT).
Black Box (inclusive Mounting Kit) with addional NSC Remote Panel
Black Box means only Prozessor which can be mounted depending on
the availability of installation locations.
The addionally NSC Remote Panel is used for the NSC Prozessor
(Power ON/OFF and Reset--Function).
Modulator--Transmitter--Receiver (inclusive Mounting Kit)
The Modulator--Transmitter--Receiver is available in 2 different versions.
The version which is destignated with “Down” has an own hausing and has to
be installed respectively.
The version which is designated with “Up” is a built--in PCB of the pedestal of
the radar antenna.
X/S--band Pedestal (inclusive Mounting Kit)
Within a NSC--System different pedestals can be used:
X--band Pedestal inclusiv 6 foot arrays
X--band Pedestal inclusiv 7 foot or 9 foot arrays
X--band Pedestal inclusiv 8 foot LPR--A25 array
S--band Pedestal inclusiv 12 foot arrays
S--band Pedestal inclusiv 12 foot LPR--A1 array
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
1 -- 1
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Optionale NSC accessories (inclusive Mounting Kit):
Interswitch Unit (inclusive Mounting Kit)
The Interswitch Unit (ISU) can connect up to 6 MK2 Transceivers,
additionally one 10kW Unit and interswitch up to 8 NSC Radars in normal
mode.
NSC Ethernet Modul (Inclusive Mounting Kit)
The Ethernet Modul is used to read in the external AIS (Automatic
Identification System) data.
Performance Monitor (PMU)
The type of Performance Monitor depends on the connected radar antenna.
There are two different types of Perfomance Monitor Typen:
-- Performance Monitor with Operator Unit for X--band Pedestal with 6 feet
array.
-- Performance Monitor für die X/S--band Pedestals with 7 / 8 / 9 or 12 foot
arrays.
3749DOC020302
1 -- 2
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
1.1
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
UNPACKING AN INSPECTION
NOTE
Retain the shipping containers, packing materials
and hardware for storage or reshipment
Prior to unpacking the NSC units, shipping cartons should be checked for
external damage, such as dents, holes, smashed corners, and water marks. If
there is any noticeable damage, the shipping agent must be contacted before
proceeding with the unpacking and installation. Depending on the type of
installation, the system may be shipped in one or more containers.
1.1.1
Major Units
All major components are shipped in cardboard shipping cartons or palatalized
shipping crates.
The cardboard shipping cartons contain fitted packing covers and/or loose filler
pellets to provide cushioning and protection for the units. Each of the units can
be removed by cutting banding or shipping tape and carefully removing the unit
along with its protective cover from its shipping container.
(1)
Inventory the contents of the shipment and verify that all the required
components have been received. Inspect all components for any shipping
damage.
CAUTION
(2)
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
EXERCISE CAUTION WHILE CUTTING THE
SHIPPING TAPE TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE
CONTENTS. IF DAMAGE TO ANY OF THE
UNITS IS NOTICED DUE TO SHIPPING OR
HANDLING, A CLAIM MUST BE FILED WITH
THE SHIPPING COMPANY.
The shipment should be verified as complete by comparing the shipment
against the carrier’s bill of lading, inventory list, or bill of materials.
1 -- 3
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
(3)
Deckstand (DS), Table Top (TT), Processor Unit
The units are shipped in a wooden container. They are bolted and banded
to a pallet which serves as the bottom of the shipping container.
The procedure below should be followed when unpacking.
(4)
Antenna Array
CAUTION
(5)
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN UNPACKING
AND REMOVING THE ARRAY(S) TO AVOID
SCRATCHING OR DAMAGING THE
FIBERGLASS FACE.
MTR Up
The MTR Up is shipped in a wooden container. The pedestal is bolted and
banded to a pallet which serves as the bottom of the shipping container.
The procedure below should be followed when unpacking.
CAUTION
3749DOC020302
DO NOT REMOVE MTR UP/ANTENNA
PEDESTAL FROM BOTTOM PALLET UNTIL
READY TO MOUNT ON MAST. DO NOT LIFT
THE ANTENNA PEDESTAL USING THE T--BAR
OR ANTENNA ARRAY, DAMAGE TO THE
ROTARY JOINT COULD RESULT.
1 -- 4
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
1.1.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Equipment Inspection
Complete and detailed packing lists are shipped with the equipment. After all
shipping containers have been unpacked, the contents should be inspected for
damage and should be checked against the packing lists to ensure that all items
are accounted for prior to starting the installation.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
1 -- 5
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
1.2
PLANNING AND SITE PREPARATION
1.2.1
Technical Data
1.2.1.1
Safe Distances to Standard--Magnetic and Steering--Magnetic Compass
1.2.1.2
3749DOC020302
NSC 25 TFT and Prozessor Unit
Safe distance to Standard--Magnetic--Compass
Safe distance to Steering--Magnetic--Compass
Reduced safe distance to Standard--Magnetic--Compass
Reduced safe distance to Standard--Magnetic--Compass
0.85 m
0.50 m
0.50 m
0.30 m
NSC 34 TFT and Prozessor Unit
Safe distance to Standard--Magnetic--Compass
Safe distance to Steering--Magnetic--Compass
Reduced safe distance to Standard--Magnetic--Compass
Reduced safe distance to Standard--Magnetic--Compass
0.85 m
0.50 m
0.50 m
0.30 m
TFT Display
NSC 25 TFT
TFT Display Size
PPI Diameter (IMO)
Resolution
Format
Display Voltage
Max Colors
Pixel Pitch
19“
12” (250mm)
1280 x 1024
5:4
230VAC
16,7 millions
0,29 (H) x 0,29 (V) mm
NSC 34 TFT
TFT Display Size
PPI Diameter (IMO)
Resolution
Format
Display Voltage
Max Colors
23.1“
16” (320mm)
1600 x 1200
4:3
230VAC
16,7 millions
1 -- 6
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Pixel Pitch
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
0,29 (H) x 0,29 (V) mm
WIDE SCREEN
TFT Display Size
PPI Diameter
Resolution
Format
Display Voltage
Max Colors
Pixel Pitch
1.2.1.3
26“
33,5 (H) x 32,5 (V) cm
1920 x 1200
16:10
230VAC
16,7 millions
0,29 (H) x 0,29 (V) mm
Processor Unit
NSC Chartradar
Processor A3300M--6 (for detailed information see Service Manual A3300M
Doc.No. 3954).
A3300M--6 special equipment
------
IntelQ965+ICH8 ATX M.B w/GA 775 socket
CPU--min. Intel P4 3GHz LGA775, FBS800MHz, 2MB Cache
RAM--1GB 667MHz DDR2 Non--ECC CL5 DIMM (Kit of 2) Single Channel
HDD--min. 40GB 2.5”, 5400RPM, SATA, automotive
2x RS232 (one internal/bracket), dual Ethernet, 6xUSB, 90....264VAC
Full Range Power Supply, Windows 2000 Pro. Eng. SP2 or higher, 12V
outlet
-- Graphic--Matrox P650 128MB DDR Dual head PCIe 16X
NSC Radar
Processor A3300M--7 (for detailed information see Service Manual A3300M
Doc.No. 3954).
A3300M--7 special equipment
-- IntelQ965+ICH8 ATX M.B w/GA 775 socket
-- CPU--min. Intel P4 3GHz LGA775, FBS800MHz, 2MB Cache
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
1 -- 7
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
-- RAM--1GB 667MHz DDR2 Non--ECC CL5 DIMM (Kit of 2) Single Channel
-- HDD--min. 40GB 2.5”, 5400RPM, SATA, automotive
-- 2x RS232 (one internal/bracket), dual Ethernet, 6xUSB, 90....264VAC
Full Range Power Supply, Windows 2000 Pro. Eng. SP2 or higher, 12V
outlet
-- Onboard Graphic
1.2.1.4
Antenna Pedestal Specifications
X--Band
S--Band
Performance
10 kW
25 kW
30 kW
Scanner size
6--ft
8--ft
LPR--A25
12--ft
LPR--A1
Horizontal Beam Width
1.2
0.95
1.9
Vertical Beam Width
25.0
24.4
26.0
Gain
29dB
31dB
28dB
Polarization
Rotation RPM
High Speed
Horizontal
22/26 RPM
40RPM
22/26
RPM
Performance
Swing Circle
Weight with Antenna
1988mm
2593mm
3884mm
32kg
80kg
169kg
Power Requirements
115VAC,1 Start Run
xx
30A
6A
60A
13A
230VAC,1 Start Run
xx
15A
3A
30A
6.5A
230VAC, 3 Start Run
----
11A
3A
22A
4.5A
380--440VAC,
3 Start Run
----
6A
2A
11A
3A
300VA
700VA
1,400VA
Power
Environmental
Vibration
IEC60945
Shock
IEC60945
Temperature
Wind Loading
3749DOC020302
--25 to +55
100 Kts Relative Operating, 150 Kts
Relative Survival
1 -- 8
Edition: 21.AUG.2009
R
NSC Radar
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Service and Installation Manual
1.2.1.5
MTR Specification
X--Band (10kW --NSC--)
X--Band
XCVR Up
Performance
Peak Power
10kW
Dynamic Range (dB)
100dB
Intermediate Frequency (MHz)
60 MHz
Receiver Noise
6.0dB
Power Requirements
Typical Power Consumption
240W
Environmental
Vibration
IEC60945
Temperature
--25 to +55
X--Band
PULSE WIDTH
Pulse Repetition Rate (PRF)
Edition: 21.AUG.2009
SHORT
RANGE
0.125, 025,
0.5, 0.75,
1.5 Nm
MED1
RANGE
3 Nm
MED2
RANGE
6, 12 Nm
LONG
RANGE
24, 48, 96
Nm
(0.08S)
(0.3S)
(0.6S)
(1.2S)
3200 Hz
1600 Hz
1600 -- 800
Hz
500 Hz
1 -- 9
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
X--Band (25kW --MK2--) -- S--Band (30kW --MK2--)
X--Band
S--Band
XCVR Up/Do
XCVR
Up/Do
XCVR
Up/Do
Peak Power
25kW
25kW
30kW
Dynamic Range (dB)
100dB
100dB
130dB
Intermediate Frequency (MHz)
60 MHz
60 MHz
60 MHz
5.5dB
5.5dB
5.0dB
Performance
Receiver Noise
Power Requirements
Typical Power Consumption
184W
195W
Environmental
Vibration
1G 5Hz to 100Hz
Shock
5G 11ms 1/2 Sinne in Three Planes
Temperature
--25 to +55
X--Band
PULSE WIDTH
3749DOC020302
S--Band
SHORT
RANGE
1/4, 1/2, 3/1,
1--1/2 Nm
MED1
RANGE
3 Nm
MED2
RANGE
6, 12 Nm
LONG
RANGE
24, 48, 96
Nm
(0.06S)
(0.25S)
(0.5S)
(1.0S)
Pulse Repetition Rate (PRF)
3000 Hz
2000 Hz
1000 Hz
750 Hz
Receiver Band Width
20 MHz
6 MHz
4 MHz
4 MHz
1 -- 10
Edition: 21.AUG.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
1.2.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Radar Performance depends on the mounting place of the Antennas
The quality of the radar performance depends on the place of the installattion.
The following places for installing the antenna can only be an example of
installation--related factors which could degrade radar performance.
Frequently, the antenna place depends from on ship‘s superstructure which can
generate reflections that effect the Radar PPI.
Other electronic waves can disturb the internal radar signal processing (Radio
antennas, SAT nav, AIS etc.).
All these parameters leading to interferences have been considered during the
project planning and design phase with target to find the best places for the
radar antennas.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
1 -- 11
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
1.2.3
Processor Unit / Monitor Site Layout
The Processor Unit / Monitor allows the separation of the processor and monitor
for ease of custom installations, i.e. console mounting.
Other guidlines to be considered include:
-- The Processor Unit / Monitor must not be exposed to weather conditions.
Do not install the Processor Unit / Monitor near entrances or exits that
expose the unit to excessiv moisture.
-- Allow sufficient clearance for service and ventilation of the unit. A minimum of
clearance from rear (see dimensional drawings in the annex) to Processor /
Monitor is required
-- Position the Processor / Monitor a minimum of two meters away from any
communications and navigation equipment that is not magnetical shielded.
1.2.4
NSC Radar for Special Uses
1.2.4.1
Explosion Proof
Please make sure that the radar is installed within the secure area.
Furthermore the installation has to comply with relevant flag state regulations
and requirements of classification societies.”
3749DOC020302
1 -- 12
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
1.3
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
SYSTEM CABLING
Prior to running cables or making connections, consider the following guidelines.
The display cabling is illustrated in this manual to ensure continuity during the
installation to the MTRs.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
(1)
If a cable passes through an outside wall, or is terminated in a unit that is
exposed to the weather, the cable entrance should be made watertight with
an approved marine fitting. The fitting should be sealed with a packing
material and covered with a caulking compound to prevent an accumulation
of moisture.
(2)
Avoid running cables in areas that are exposed to extremes of heat such as
steam lines.
(3)
Protect cables with tubing if there is a possibility that the cable will be
subjected to mechanical abrasion or chafing.
(4)
When existing cable runs are used to hang and secure the cables, ensure
that there is no possibility of radiated interference.
(5)
Determine cable entry point into the base unit. Cable entry to the base unit
can be from the bottom or from an access plate at the left rear of the
cabinet.
1 -- 13
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
1.3.1
Power Requirements
In designing the Monitor Versions, MTR Up and MTR Down, efforts have been
made to ensure satisfactory operation with power supplied by most prime power
systems. In an attempt to guard against system mailfunctions caused by
externally radiated or conducted transients, or from electrical signals
superimposed on the power lines supplying the system and power distribution
should comply with:
3749DOC020302
(1)
The system power source should be capable of handling the originally
installed equipment, as well as taking into consideration the possibility of
adding options or future expansion.
(2)
The power source should be stable and noise--free. If possible, the power
should be derived from a dedicated line.
(3)
Do not connect large electric motors, air conditioners, or high
current--drawing equipment to the same circuit as the NSC radar.
(4)
The transceiver has to be supplied with 115V (AC) through isolating
transformer only!
Use a step down transformer 116--087 NG002 to connect 230V to 115V
and isolate the power for both radar processor and pedestal electronics.
The monitor and the antenna motor can be 230V or 115V by moving a
switch or jumpers.
1 -- 14
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
EQUIPMENT PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
This chapter contains the procedures for the physical installation of all the
NSC Equipment (see Drawing Radar System Overview in the annex).
In general:
All below mentioned information of physical installation are manufacturers
recommendations. At least all equipment has to be installed according to ship‘s
conditions.
For the 6 foot antenna equipment see chapters 2.8.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 1
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.1
GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1.1
Bonding
The purpose of bonding radar equipment to a local earth ground is to prevent
radio frequency interference (RFI) and to minimize the chance of lightning
damage.
Proper site planning must include provisions for installing a low resistance
ground system path as close as possible (2 foot maximum) to each unit in the
system.
Bonding practices considered acceptable by Raytheon Anschütz include not only
the use of bonding straps but also connection of cable shields and drains to
cable entrance clamps. Ground lugs adjacent to these clamps are provided in
each unit and should be used for connection of unused conductors.
Copper strapping, 60 mil inch thick by 1--1/4--inch wide is provided for electrical
bonding of the Pedestal, MTR(s), NSC Monitors and auxiliary units to the ground
system.
These straps should be as short as possible.
While copper is the recommended material for bonding straps, its presents a
corrosion problem if not treated properly.
Use of a non--migratory grease compound such as NO--AL--OX will minimize
galvanic interaction and ensure a long--lasting, low resistance connection.
The length of the bonding strap should be cut to form the shortest possible path
to the bonding point. All surfaces should be carefully cleaned and coated with
NO--AL--OX compound prior to assembly.
Placing the bonding strap under an equipment mounting bolt is not considered
proper bonding procedure.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 2
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.1.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
System Cabling
Prior to running cables or making connections, consider the following guidelines.
The display cabling is illustrated in this manual to ensure continuity during the
installation to the MTRs.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
(1)
If a cable passes through an outside wall, or is terminated in a unit that is
exposed to the weather, the cable entrance should be made watertight with
an approved marine fitting. The fitting should be sealed with a packing
material and covered with a caulking compound to prevent an accumulation
of moisture.
(2)
Avoid running cables in areas that are exposed to extremes of heat such as
steam lines.
(3)
Protect cables with tubing if there is a possibility that the cable will be
subjected to mechanical abrasion or chafing.
(4)
When existing cable runs are used to hang and secure the cables, ensure
that there is no possibility of radiated interference.
(5)
Determine cable entry point into the base unit. Cable entry to the base unit
can be from the bottom or from an access plate at the left rear of the
cabinet.
2 -- 3
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.1.3
Power Requirements
In designing the NSC MTR Up and MTR Down, efforts have been made to
ensure satisfactory operation with power supplied by most prime power systems.
In an attempt to guard against system malfunctions caused by externally
radiated or conducted transients, or from electrical signals superimposed on the
power lines supplying the system and power distribution should comply with:
3749DOC020302
(1)
The system power source should be capable of handling the originally
installed equipment, as well as taking into consideration the possibility of
adding options or future expansion.
(2)
The power source should be stable and noise--free. If possible, the power
should be derived from a dedicated line.
(3)
Do not connect large electric motors, air conditioners, or high
current--drawing equipment to the same circuit as the NSC Radar.
2 -- 4
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.1.4
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Compass Safe Distance
All below mentioned distances have een rounded up to the nearest 0.1 meter in
order to allow for a maximum deviation which might be caused by the most
magnetic sample of all units manufactured.
Below mentioned tables show a standard and a steering coloumn.
Standard means: “Standard--Magnetic--Compass”
Steering means: “Steering--Magnetic--Compass”
2.1.4.1
Safe Distance Magnetic Compass versus Monitor and Processor
Compass safe distances are described in Table 2--1
Safe Distance
1/4 DEG
STANDARD
1 DEG
STEERING
Reduced Safe Distance*
1/4 DEG
STANDARD
1 DEG
STEERING
Control
Panel
0.3 M
0.3 M
----------------------
--------------------
Processor
Unit
0.4 M
0.3 M
----------------------
--------------------
NSC 25 TFT 0.85 M
with
Processor
0.5 M
0.5 M
0.3 M
NSC 34 TFT 0.85 M
with
Processor
0.5 M
0.5 M
0.3 M
Table 2--1 Compass Safe Distance
*Reduced Safe Distance concerns restricted areas, for example coastal
shipping.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 5
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.1.4.2
Safe Distance Magnetic Compass versus Antenna
1/4 DEG
STANDARD
1 DEG
STEERING
7FT X--BAND ANTENNA
0.3M
0.3M
8FT X--BAND LPR--A25
5M
5M
9FT X--BAND ANTENNA
0.3M
0.3M
12FT S--BAND ANTENNA
0.3M
0.3M
12FT S--BAND LPR--A1
5M
5M
Table 2--2 Antenna Compass Safe Distance
2.1.4.3
Safe Distance Magnetic Compass versus MTR Up
1/4 DEG
STANDARD
1 DEG
STEERING
X--BAND MTR UP
1.3M
0.8M
X--BAND MTR UP with 8FT Antenna
6.3M
5.8M
S--BAND ANTENNA
4.2M
2.7M
S--BAND ANTENNA with 12FT
Antenna
9.2M
9.7M
Table 2--3 MTR Up and Array Compass Safe Distance
2.1.4.4
Safe Distance Magnetic Compass versus MTR Down Pedestal
1/4 DEG
STANDARD
1 DEG
STEERING
X--BAND PEDESTAL
(SINGLE PHASE)
0.7M
0.4M
X--BAND PEDESTAL with 8FT
Antenna (SINGLE PHASE)
5.7M
5.4M
S--BAND PEDESTAL
1.1M
0.7M
S--BAND PEDESTAL with 12FT
Antenna
6.1M
5.7M
S--BAND MTR DOWN
4.1M
2.6M
X--BAND MTR DOWN
2.2M
1.4M
Table 2--4 MTR Down Pedestal and MTR Down Compass Safe Distance
3749DOC020302
2 -- 6
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
PROCESSOR, MONITOR AND INTERSWITCH UNIT INSTALLATION
There are manifold configurations of installation.
In the following chapters only recommendations can be made how to install the
equipment.
The base of all installations are the dimensional drawings and wiring diagrams at
the annex.
2.2.1
General Installation-- hints for the NSC-- Processor
This Processor can be installed either:
-- in the housing of a Deckstand
-- anywhere close to the respective display
Each Processor has to be connected to the respective display via a “Radar
Connection Module NSC” .
The installation location of this modul is also not dictated.
The following installation guide lines should be observed whenever possible.
Refer to the Dimensional Drawings for dimensions and mounting details in the
annex of this Installation Manual.
The Processor Unit/Monitor allows the separation of the processor and monitor
for ease of custom installations, i.e. console mounting.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 7
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Other guidelines to be considered include:
3749DOC020302
(1)
The Processor Unit/Monitor/Radar Connection Module must not be
exposed to weather conditions.
Do not install the Processor Unit/Monitor/ Radar Connection Module near
entrances or exits that expose the unit to excessive moisture.
(2)
Allow sufficient clearance for service and ventilation of the unit. A minimum
of special clearance from rear of Processor Unit/Monitor/Radar Connection
Modul is required.
(3)
The Processor Unit is intended for bulk head mounting. The monitor is
intended for table top mounting with the control panel set in to a console.
Table top height should be selected for optimum viewing of the monitor.
(4)
The Processor Unit, Monitor and Radar Connection Unit should be installed
away from magnetic compass, MTR or other equipment with high magnetic
fields to avoid magnetic disturbance of the monitors presentation
(chapter 2.1.4.1).
2 -- 8
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Service and Installation Manual
2.2.2
NSC Monitor used as Table Top
Clearance must be provided for maintenance and ventilation.
See Dimensional Drawings:
900--015.HP005 for Monitor NSC 25 TFT
900--017.HP007 for Monitor NSC 34 TFT HT
900--021.HP005 for Monitor NSC 34 TFT
in the annex.
NSC 25 TFT
Figure: 2--1
NSC 25 Monitor TFT
NSC 34 TFT
Figure: 2--2
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC 34 TFT HT
NSC 34 Monitor (TFT and TFT HT)
2 -- 9
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.2.3
NSC Monitor used as Deckstand
NOTE
NSC 25 Monitor is actually not available as a deckstand version.
The NSC Monitor Deckstand is normally secured to the deck using a
customer--furnished, custom--made foundation. Customer defines the hardware
to be used to secure the deckstand to the deck foundation.
Sufficient clearance must be provided for maintenance and ventilation.
See Dimensional Drawings
900--012.HP005
900--012.HP007 in the annex
NSC 34 Monitor
(Deckstand)
Figure: 2--3
3749DOC020302
NSC 34 Monitor
(Deckstand with hood)
NSC 34 Monitor (Deckstand)
2 -- 10
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.2.4
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
NSC Interswitch Unit
Depending on the type of NSC radar system, the interswitch unit can be
mounted into a deck stand or near the Processor Unit.
See Dimensional Drawings:
900--020.HP005
900--020.HP013
The NSC Interswitch Unit must not be exposed to weather conditions.
Do not install the NSC Interswitch Unit near entrances or exits that expose the
unit to excessive moisture.
2.2.5
NSC Ethernet Modul
Depending on the type of NSC radar system, the Ethernet module can be
mounted into a deck stand or near the Processor Unit.
See Dimensional Drawings:
928--009.HP005
The NSC Ethernet Modul must not be exposed to weather conditions.
Do not install the NSC Ethernet Unit near entrances or exits that expose the unit
to excessive moisture.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 11
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.3
NSC MTR UP/PEDESTAL AND MTR DOWN INSTALLATION
2.3.1
Mounting Structure Installation
Mounting structures must be designed to provide proper support for the Pedestal
with Antenna Array and provide safe access for service personnel. More than
the static weight of the Pedestal must be taken into consideration when
designing the support structure to account for harmonic vibration and high
acceleration forces generated under dynamic shipboard conditions.
Extreme environmental conditions must also be considered.
Consider Compass safe distances when planning the mounting structure to
ensure that the equipment being installed is provided with the minimum safe
distance.
2.3.2
Mounting and Service Platform
A typical installation of the Pedestal is illustrated in Figure: 2--4 . In this type of
installation, the higher the antenna generally provides a less restricted antenna
radiation pattern and as in any installation, antenna height is one factor that
determines the maximum range of the radar.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 12
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Figure: 2--4
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Typical Mounting Platform
NOTE
The radar system meets the vibration requirements according to
EN60945 (IEC 60945).
On installing the NSC Pedestal/Transceiver this has to be taken
into account by all means.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 13
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.3.3
Mechanical Installation
The NSC MTR Up/Pedestal unit should be isolated from steel mounting plates
and aluminum pedestal.
Secure the NSC pedestal to the mounting plate with customer supplied
hardware (Installation Kit). Refer to Figure: 2--5 for hardware requirements.
Refer to Table 2--2 through Table 2--4 for compass safe distances (chapter
2.1.4.2).
The MTR Up/Pedestal should be bolted to a flat, 1/2 inch (12.7mm)
horizontal (+3_), steel mounting plate. The plate should be welded to a pipe or
bracket assembly of sufficient strength to support 350 pounds (159kg) static
weight (vibration).
21.60
21.60
(549mm)
(549mm)
Cable and
Waveguide
access
Cable
and Waveguide
access
MOUNTING HARDWARE
MOUNTING HARDWARE
9.25
9.25
(234.95mm)
(234.95mm)
M12x80mm
X-Band
Mounting Plate
7.257.25
(184.15mm)
(184..15mm)
(M12x80)
1/2-13
2-1/2
1/2--13
x 2-x-1/2
SS Mounting Bolts, 4 ea
SSRPN
Mounting
Bolts, 4ea
169461-117
1/2--13 x 2--1/2
SS Mounting Bolts, 4ea
19.60
19.60
Washer, Flat, 4 ea
Washer,
Flate, 4ea
RPN 236-1149P29
(497.84mm)
(497.84mm)
Washer, Lock, 4 ea
(605.536mm)
(605.53mm)
23.84
23.84
Washer,
Lock, 4ea
RPN 236-1150P10
Nut, 4 ea
Nut,
8 ea
RPN
203-1001P15
FORWARD
9.26
9.62
(244.35mm)
(244.35mm)
Cable and Waveguide
Cable and
access
Waveguide access
Figure: 2--5
S-Band
Mounting Plate
0.50 (12.7mm)
Washer,
Steel
Plate Flate, 4ea
Washer, Lock, 4ea
7.627.62
(193.548mm)
(193.54mm)
Nut, 8 ea
FORWARD
21.84
21.84
(554.74mm)
(554.74mm)
NSC MTR Up/Pedestal Mounting Plates
The NSC MTR Up/Pedestal must be bonded to the ships hull using a 500
millimeter long, 1--1/4 inch (32mm) wide copper strap. The bonding strap, bolts
and bonding surfaces should be treated with an anticorrosive grease such as
NO--AL--OX to prevent galvanic corrosion.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 14
Edition: 21.AUG.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.3.3.1
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
NSC MTR Up/Pedestal Hoisting and Mounting
When installing the NSC MTR Up/Pedestal, it is recommended that the antenna
array and the NSC MTR Up/Pedestal be assembled on the ground first, then
hoisted into position.
CAUTION
WHEN LIFTING, EXERCISE EXTREME CARE
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ANTENNA
ARRAY, PARTICULARLY THE ARRAY FACE
PROTECTIVE COVER.
When hoisting the assembled array and NSC MTR Up/Pedestal, care should be
used to prevent the lifting straps from rubbing against the array face. The
following procedure is recommended for hoisting the assembled NSC MTR
Up/Pedestal and antenna array:
Edition: 21.AUG.2009
(1)
Rotate the antenna so that the face of the array faces to the rear of the
NSC MTR Up/Pedestal. Maintain the antenna in this position while hoisting.
(2)
Carefully hoist by the hoisting brackets, see Figure: 2--6 unit is in
position above the pre--installed mounting plate. Align mounting holes in
NSC MTR Up/Pedestal with those on the mounting plate and carefully
lower unit.
(3)
Carefully lower NSC MTR Up/Pedestal to allow placement of four bolts
through the feet and the mounting plate. Keep tension on the hoist,
allowing for customer supplied isolation shim placement.
2 -- 15
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
(4)
Before lifting straps are removed, if required level the MK2 MTR
Up/Pedestal by raising the MTR Up/Pedestal and inserting additional
customer supplied 1/32--inch fiberglass shim(s) or 1/16 inch fiberglass
shim(s) between the MTR Up/Pedestal and mounting plate to assure a
sound mechanical contact of the MTR Up/Pedestal and mounting plate.
See Figure: 2--7 .
(5)
Before lifting straps are removed, secure the MK2 MTR Up/Pedestal to the
mounting plate using four 1/2--13 x 2--1/2 inch (M12x80) bolts, eight flat
washers, four lock washers and nuts.
Hardware should be of 18--8 stainless steel, coated liberally with grease.
Customer will supply hardware.
(6)
Remove hoisting line.
X-Band Pedestal
WARN
ING
WARN
ING
REAR
HOISTING
BRACKETS
S-Band Pedestal
FORWARD
Figure: 2--6
3749DOC020302
NSC MTR Up/Pedestal Hoisting Brackets
2 -- 16
Edition: 21.AUG.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.3.3.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
NSC MTR Up/Pedestal Bonding
(1)
After the NSC MTR Up/Pedestal has been properly positioned on the
mounting plate and securely bolted in place, the unit must be bonded to the
ship’s hull.
(2)
Connect the bonding strap, Figure: 2--7 from the NSC MTR Up/Pedestal to
the mast and then to the ships hull, using customer supplied hardware.
Coat bonding hardware liberally using NO--AL--OX.
NOTE
Remove Hosting Brackets and to prevent dissimilar metals from
corroding. These temporary brackets will rust.
Bolt M12x80mm (4ea)
Washer, Flat 12mm (4ea).
Washer, 13mm (4ea)
Nut, Hex. M12mm (8ea)
1. Bolt, M8x40mm 20 (2ea)
2. Washer, Flat 8,4mm (2ea)
Figure: 2--7
Edition: 21.AUG.2009
Bonding strap to ships
M8 thread
hull
NSC MTR Up/Pedestal Mounting and Bonding
2 -- 17
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.3.3.3
MTR Up/Pedestal Oil Check
NSC MTR Up/Pedestals are shipped with the proper level of oil added.
The MTR Up/Pedestal has an oil level sight gage to verify the oil level.
(1)
Remove power from MTR Up/Pedestal, and place the Antenna Safety
Switch to OFF.
(2)
Check the gear box assembly lubricant level by observing the oil level sight
gage, .Figure: 2--8 The oil level should be seen 1/2 way up the oil sight
gage. Gear box assembly lubricant capacity is 1.8 quarts, (1.7L) for
X--Band and 2.11 quarts, (2.0L) for S--Band. Use Mobil synthetic oil (SHC
634) Raytheon. Remote Antenna Safety Switch
CAUTION
DO NOT OVER FILL OIL RESERVOIR
Oil
level sight gage
OIL LEVEL SIGHT GAGE
Oil
OILdrain
DRAINplug
PLUG
ON
OFF
Antenna safety switch
Pedestal ground strap
PEDESTAL GROUND STRAP
ANTENNA SAFETY SWITCH
Figure: 2--8
3749DOC020302
MTR Up/Pedestal
2 -- 18
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.3.4
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Antenna Array Mounting
The 7ft., 9ft., 12ft. X--Band or 8ft. LPR--A25 X--Band and 12ft. S--Band or 12ft.
S--Band LPR--A1 Arrays and the NSC MTR Up/Pedestal are shipped in separate
crates and must be assembled at the installation site. Use the following
procedure for assembly of the Antenna Array to the MTR Up/Pedestal:
CAUTION
DO NOT SCRATCH, PAINT OR OTHERWISE
DAMAGE THE PROTECTIVE COVER OF THE
ANTENNA ARRAY.
2.3.4.1
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
X-- Band Array Mounting
(1)
Unpack array using care not to damage array mounting studs.
(2)
Remove tape from waveguide flange of antenna array.
(3)
Remove antenna probe feed protection cover. Use caution when lifting the
array into position to avoid damaging the probe.
(4)
Grease O--Ring located around rotary joint housing with Silicone Grease.
(5)
Lift the antenna array into position above the mounting bar and carefully
align the mounting holes; then lower the array onto the mounting bar. Coat
array mounting studs with silicone grease, Figure: 2--9 .
2 -- 19
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Coat ring with
silicone grease
Remove tape from
waveguide flange
Coat stud with
silicone grease
Washer, flat 3/8
CAUTION
REMOVE GRAY PHENOLIC
PROTECTOR ON W/G *) PROBE
BEFORE ARRAY INSTALLATION
Washer, lock 3/8
Nut 3/8
DO NOT BEND PEDESTAL
WAVEGUIDE PROBE
Torque
35Nm
(max.)
*) Wave Guide
Figure: 2--9 X--Band Array Mounting
(6)
3749DOC020302
Secure the X--Band antenna array to the MTR Up/Pedestal with four
stainless steel flat washers, with four 3/8“ lock washers and with four nuts
provided. Tighten hardware using 14 MM or 9/16 socket.
2 -- 20
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.3.4.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
8ft X--Band LPR--A25 Array Mounting
(1)
Unpack array using care not to damage array mounting studs
(Stock--No. 2.808435).
Use the separate Mounting Kit which is lying in the box.
(2)
Remove tape from waveguide flange of antenna array.
(3)
Remove antenna probe feed protection cover. Use caution when lifting the
array into position to avoid damaging the probe.
(4)
Grease O--Ring located around rotary joint housing with Silicone Grease.
(5)
Lift the antenna array into position above the mounting bar and carefully
align the mounting holes; then lower the array onto the mounting bar. Coat
array mounting studs with silicone grease, Figure: 2--10 .
Coat ring with
silicone grease
Remove tape from
waveguide flange
Coat stud with
silicone grease
CAUTION
REMOVE GRAY PHENOLIC
PROTECTOR ON W/G *) PROBE
BEFORE ARRAY INSTALLATION
DO NOT BEND PEDESTAL
WAVEGUIDE PROBE
Torque
35Nm
(max.)
*) Wave Guide
Figure: 2--10
(6)
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
X--Band Array Mounting
Secure the X--Band antenna array to the MTR Up/Pedestal with four
self--locking nuts (M8).
2 -- 21
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.3.4.3
12ft S-- Band Array Mounting
Prior mounting the array to the MTR Up/Pedestal, install the 1/2” array coax with
the 7--16 DIN, 90_ elbow connectors, as shown in Figure: 2--11 . Coat inside of
coax connectors with DC--4 compound.
CAUTION
3749DOC020302
NEVER USE GREASE OR RTV INSIDE RF
CONNECTORS. DC--4 COMPOUND IS AN
INSULATOR DESIGNED WITH A VERY LOW
SURFACE TENSION FOR USE AS AN
INSULATOR IN CONNECTORS.
(1)
Unpack the array, using care not to damage the array end feed 7--16 DIN
RF Connector.
(2)
Unpack the 1/2--coax cable from shipping box.
(3)
Locate and remove saddle clamp located at the end of the T--bar using a
number 3 metric allen wrench.
(4)
Locate and remove the two (2) 90_ DIN connectors from the installation
materials.
(5)
Carefully remove the O--rings from the two 90_ DIN connectors and the
DIN connectors of the 1/2--in coax cable. Apply a thin coat of silicone
grease to the rubber O--rings and re--install O--rings into the DIN
connectors.
(6)
Loosely attach a 90_ DIN connector to the MTR Up/Pedestal.
2 -- 22
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
(7)
Attach the coax cable to the 90_ DIN connector attached to the MTR Up/Pe
destal. Use a 1--1/4 inch open end wrench and tighten coax cable to the
DIN connector.
(8)
Attach the coax cable to the T--bar using the saddle clamp removed in
step 3.
(9)
Lift the antenna array into position above the mounting bar, and carefully
align the mounting holes; then, lower the array onto the T--bar.
(10) Secure the antenna array to the MTR Up/Pedestal using sixteen (16)
stainless steel bolts, 5/16 inch flat washers and 5/16 inch lock washers
provided.
(11) Coat bolts with a thin film of silicone grease.
(12) Attach the coax cable to the bottom of the array using saddle clamps.
Saddle clamps attach to the threaded studs mounted to the under side of
the array.
(13) Attach a 90_ DIN connector to the array end--feed and the coax cable to
the 90_ DIN connector. Use a 1--1/4 inch open end wrench and tighten
coax cable to the DIN connector.
(14) Use a 3/8 to 1--1/4 Basin Wrench to tighten the DIN connector to the array
end--feed.
(15) Use a 3/8 to 1--1/4 Basin Wrench to tighten the DIN connector at the MTR
Up/Pedestal rotary joint.
(16) Weather seal wrap the Coax DIN connector at the array
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 23
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
CONN. ELBOW
CLAMP. SADDLE
CONN. ELBOW
WASHER. FLAT
WASHER. LOCK. 5/16
BOLT. 5/16--18x1 1/4
COAT BOLT WITH
SILICONE GREASE
Torque
35Nm (max.)
INSTALL 1/2 INCH ARRAY COAX. BEFORE
INSTALLING ARRAY
Figure: 2--11 S--Band Array Mounting
3749DOC020302
2 -- 24
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.3.4.4
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
12ft S-- Band LPR-- A1 Array Mounting
CAUTION
NEVER USE GREASE OR RTV INSIDE RF
CONNECTORS. DC--4 COMPOUND IS AN
INSULATOR DESIGNED WITH A VERY LOW
SURFACE TENSION FOR USE AS AN
INSULATOR IN CONNECTORS.
 Preliminaries
(1)
You have to uninstall the 90_ elbow connector from the T--bar female.
The elbow connector is pre installed.
Use 27mm open end wrench .
T--bar
female
(2)
Unpack the 1/2--coax cable from shipping box.
Remove the male cover ((blue plastic cap) Fig. A) from the 90_ DIN
connector (Figure: 2--12 ).
Remove the saddle clamp located at the end of the T--bar using a number
3 metric allen wrench (Fig. B).
Figure: 2--12 1/2--Coax Cable --Preliminaries--
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 25
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
(3)
Attach the coax cable (90_ DIN connector) to the female T--bar (Fig. A).
Fix the connector by hand.
Attach the coax cable to the T--bar (Fig. C) using the saddle clamp
removed in step (2) B (Figure: 2--12 ).
Use a 32mm open end wrench and tie up (very carefully) the male
connector to the female T--bar as tightly as possible (Fig. B).
Figure: 2--13 1/2--Coax Cable Mounting
 Array mounting
(1)
Unpack the array, using care not to damage the array.
(Stock--No. 2.808434).
Use the separate Mounting Kit which is lying in the box.
(2)
Put the carrying strips (tautened) over the left and right array side.
Attach the transport hooks from crane to the eye hooks.
Coat bolts with a thin film of silicon.
carrying strips
eye hooks
this figure shows
the antenna cross
up--end.
For the transport
the antenna has to
lay down plane.
Figure: 2--14 Array Transport
3749DOC020302
2 -- 26
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Service and Installation Manual
(3)
Lift the antenna array into position above the mounting bar, and carefully
align the mounting holes; then lower the array onto the T--bar.
Secure the antenna array to the MTR Up/Pedestal using the twelve
stainless steel bolts, 12 conical spring washer and 24 nuts.
Torque
35Nm (max.)
Figure: 2--15
(4)
Array Mounting
Remove the female cover (white plastic cap) from the coax cable. connect
the coax cable with the array coax part very carefully (Fig. A and B)
without twisting the coax cable.
coax cable
array coax part
Figure: 2--16
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
coax coupling
Coax Cable Compounding
2 -- 27
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
(5)
Attach the coax coupling. For this job you need a second person for help.
Use 24mm, 30mm and 32mm open end wrench.
32mm
for pulling
the male
30mm
for fixing the position
of the cables
24mm
for fixing the positions of
the cables
CAUTION
Do not twist the
coax cables !
Figure: 2--17
(6)
Coax Coupling Attaching
Wrap weather sealing tape (approximately 0,5m) around the coax coupling
(Fig. A and B)
Figure: 2--18
3749DOC020302
Coax Coupling Isolating
2 -- 28
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.3.5
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
MTR Down Physikal Installation
Install the MTR Down unit using 4 each 3/8--16 (M10) mounting hardware is
recommended. Refer to chapter 2.4.2 Transmission Line Installation and
Dimensional Drawing G624721.
2.3.5.1
MTR Bonding
Follow the procedures in chapter 2.1.1.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 29
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.4
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION / CONNECTION NSC MTR AND PEDESTAL
This chapter contains information about:
Connection of all electrical plugs and wires
Connection of bonding
Installation of Transmission Lines
3749DOC020302
2 -- 30
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Service and Installation Manual
2.4.1
General Information concerning on-- board wiring
See Project Diagramm.
2.4.2
Transmission Line Installation
Figure: 2--19 illustrates a typical X--band, Figure: 2--20 illustrates a typical
S--Band transmission line installations.
90 E--bend
use M4 x 20 mm
screw
Bonding strap
6 or 12 inch flex wg.
Pressure window
Mounting plate
Mast
Continuous run
elliptical waveguide
Kick box (W/G
protection)
Water tight structure
gland
Deck structure
Hangers at minimum
3ft. (1 meter)
Pressure gage
W/Valve
Pressure window
Bi--directional coupler
E--bend, use M4
x 16 mm screw
Filter upgrade for
X--band MTR see
lable
Figure: 2--19 X--Band Transmission Line Installation
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 31
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
MK 2 ARRAY
PEDESTAL
BULKHEAD
CONN.
Pedestal
bulkhead
FEMALE 7/16 DIN
conn. female 7/16Din
9090°Din
DIN (G625855-1)
MALE DIN
Male
Din
ClampCLAMP,
saddle
SADDLE
G624437-5
MK2 PEDESTAL
BONDING STRAP
Bonding
strap
MOUNTING PLATE
Mounting
plate
MAST
Mast
CONTINUOUS RUN 7/8-IN COAX
RAYTHEON PRODUCT CODE
Continuous
run
M27544 = 1 METER
DIN COAX KIT
M27545 = 10 METER
DIN COAX
7/8--In
CoaxKIT
M27546 = 20 METER DIN COAX KIT
M27547 = 30 METER DIN COAX KIT
HANGERS
AT MINIMUM
Hangers
at6 minimum
3 FT. (0.944 METER)
3ft.
meter)
Kit
of 10(1
each,
RPN G261285-1
EIA/Din
adapter
EIA/DIN
ADAPTER
RPN G626505-2
EIA EIA
FLANGE
AND and
O-RING
flange
O--ring
Male
MALE
7/16-IN DIN, 90° CONN.
(P/N G625855-1)
FEMALE
Female
Figure: 2--20 NSC Down Physical Installation
Microwave energy is carried between the MTR and the Antenna by means of
waveguide or transmission lines. At the microwave frequencies used in radar
systems, the type of lines most often employed are enclosed waveguide
(X--Band) or coaxial lines (S--Band). The characteristics which determine their
efficiency of these transmission lines are a result of the waveguide dimensions
and geometrical configuration as well as the dielectric material used as coaxial
filler material.
Before proceeding with the waveguide installation, ensure that all waveguide
components and accessories are on hand. Ensure that proper climbing gear is
worn while working on the tower, and that all safety precautions are followed.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 32
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
The primary objective in the planning and installation of a transmission line is to
provide the lowest signal loss between the MTR and the antenna.
Considerations critical to this primary objective are:
(1)
Minimum length.
(2)
Minimum number of bends and flanges.
(3)
Careful attention to proper fabrication techniques for flanges and
connectors.
(4)
Careful attention to physical support and location.
(5)
Extreme caution in handling the lines to prevent kinks, dents, water or
dirt infiltration and any other physical damage or contamination.
A waveguide run is required from the X--band pedestal waveguide rotating joint
to the waveguide output flange of the MTR. Rigid waveguide (in standard
12--foot lengths) and choke and cover flanges are available from Raytheon.
NOTE
Table 2--5 illustrates the signal loss in dB per 50or 100 feet length
of various types of transmission lines.
An “O“--ring gasket must always be used when assembling waveguide runs in a
choke--to--cover coupling. The choke flange must be positioned to face away
from the Antenna and toward the MTR along the line of the run.
Coupling flanges must be silver--soldered to the waveguide ends. The following
guidelines should be observed.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
(1)
The waveguide ends and flange walls must be chemically cleaned to
ensure an efficient bond.
(2)
The finished joint must be smooth and clean.
2 -- 33
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.4.2.1
(3)
The internal walls must be smoothed and polished to ensure a continuous
contact.
(4)
Rectangular plastic brackets must be used to secure the waveguide run to
the tower and to the ceilings and walls of the equipment room.
Recommended Types of X--Band Transmission Lines
The following types of X--Band transmission lines (waveguides), Table 2--5, are
recommended.
Type
Attenutation
dB/100ft. @
9.375 GHz
Length ft (m)
Rigid, Large X, WR112
(UG--51U), Copper
2.4 dB
100 (30.5)
Elliptical (Raytheon P/N
166606--1) EW85, Copper
2.7 dB
100 (30.5)
Rigid, Small X (Raytheon
P/N 341--1006P1) WR90
(RG--52U), Copper
3.8 dB
50 (15.25)
Table 2--5 Recommanded X--Band Transmission Lines:
2.4.2.2
3749DOC020302
Elliptical Waveguide Installation
(1)
Elliptical waveguide is available in various lengths; use a continuous length
where possible.
(2)
Use manufacturer--approved methods for hoisting continuous lengths of
waveguide into position. Exercise extreme caution to avoid physically
damaging the waveguide.
(3)
If it is necessary to chapter the run, use elliptical waveguide splices to
connect chapters together.
2 -- 34
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
(4)
Bend waveguide with a bending tool, using extreme caution to ensure
proper bend radius without damaging waveguide.
a. The minimum bend radius in the E--Plane is 8 inches (203.2mm).
b. The minimum bend radius in the H--Plane is 19 inches (482.6mm)
(5)
Use Waveguide Hangers, at minimum 3 foot (914.4mm) intervals to ensure
proper support.
(6)
Use structure glands to ensure weather tight fit at walls or ceilings, etc.
(7)
Flex chapters are required to minimize the effects of shock and vibration.
Do not exceed recommended lengths of flex waveguide.
(8)
Internal walls must be clean to ensure continuous conductivity. No oxidation
should be present.
(9)
All joints must be choke--to--cover. Choke flanges must face the MTR along
the line of the run. For EW--85 elliptical run, a choke to choke Waveguide
chapter is required at the Pedestal end to mate with the EW--85 adapter.
(10) All joints must have O--rings to ensure a proper seal. Coat O--rings with a
small amount of silicone grease (DC--4 or equivalent).
(11) Use 8--32 X5/8 inch stainless steel attaching hardware for flange joints.
Coat hardware with anti--seize compound.
(12) Andrews elliptical connectors must be carefully assembled per
manufacturers’ instructions.
(13) The waveguide run should be provided with a protective encasement,
where possibility of physical damage exists.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 35
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.4.2.3
Fabrication of Rigid Waveguide
Faulty fabrication of waveguide chapters (improperly fitted flanges, flux and dirt
contamination, oxidation, etc.) is a primary cause of high signal losses which
result in poor radar operation. Advance planning of the transmission line will
allow the proper chapters to be obtained pre--assembled from the supplier of
these components.
If on--site fabrication is required, only qualified personnel should attempt the
operation. Due to its nature, no detailed instruction in waveguide fabrication will
be provided here. However, the following notes should be considered.
3749DOC020302
(1)
Determine length of the chapter required, then cut to length less the
combined length of both flanges to be fitted.
(2)
Cut must be precisely 90_ (perpendicular) to the waveguide chapter.
(3)
De--burr cut ends and clean with a chemical solvent. The waveguide ends
and flange walls must be chemically cleaned to ensure an efficient bond.
(4)
Flanges must be silver--soldered or brazed to the waveguide chapter.
Under no circumstances is soft--solder acceptable due to its lack of
mechanical rigidity and susceptibility to shrinking and cracking.
(5)
Finished chapters should be purged with pressurized dry air and pressure
checked.
(6)
Internal space variation between walls, after bending or twisting, shall not
exceed 0.5mm.
(7)
Coupling flange faces must not be damaged in any way.
(8)
The finished joint must be smooth and clean.
(9)
The interior surfaces of the waveguide and flanges must be free of flux,
dirt, oxidation, salt and corrosion.
2 -- 36
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Use of Andrews elliptical waveguide eliminates the need to fabricate rigid
waveguide flanges since, due to its flexibility, it can be supplied and installed in a
single continuous length. Flanges, which add a 0.1db loss per unit, are thus
eliminated, and due to this principle advantage, the Andrews elliptical waveguide
is best suited to many applications.
2.4.2.4
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Rigid Waveguide Installation
(1)
Plan run for a minimum of joints. Each joint can add as much as 0.1 dB
attenuation.
(2)
Flex chapters are required to minimize the effects of shock and vibration.
Do not exceed recommended lengths of flex waveguide.
(3)
Use rigid bends and twists in lieu of flexible waveguide for the same
purpose. A variety of styles are available to meet most needs.
(4)
Internal walls must be smooth and polished to ensure continuous
conductance. No oxidation should be present. Use extra--fine emery or
crocus cloth for this purpose. Do not file or mar surface in any way.
(5)
All joints must be choke--to--cover. Choke flanges must face the MTR along
the line of the run.
(6)
All joints must have O--rings to ensure a proper seal. Coat O--rings with
silicone grease (DC--4 or equivalent).
(7)
Use 8--32 stainless steel attaching hardware for flange joints. Coat
hardware with anti--seize compoun
(8)
Use Waveguide Hangers, at minimum 3 foot (914.4mm) intervals to ensure
proper support.
(9)
The waveguide run should be provided with a protective encasement
where possibility of mechanical damage exists.
2 -- 37
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.4.2.5
Running the Waveguide
To run the waveguide into position, place the bulk coil at or near the MTR
location. Unroll the coil as needed while feeding the waveguide along the
predetermined route. On--site evaluation is necessary to determine the best
routing.
2.4.2.6
Cutting the Waveguide
CAUTION
3749DOC020302
A PRESSURE--TIGHT SEAL DEPENDS ON
THE CAREFUL PREPARATION OF THE
WAVEGUIDE END. FOLLOW THESE
DIRECTIONS CLOSELY TO OBTAIN
OPTIMUM RESULTS.
(1)
Firmly pack clean cloth into the waveguide beyond the point where cut is to
be made. This prevents chips and metal dust from entering the waveguide.
(2)
Clamp the cutting vise to a straight chapter of waveguide which is to be
prepared for the connector. Align the hardened steel face of the vise with
the mark at the point where the cut is to be made. Assure that waveguide is
seated squarely in channel which forms the base of the vise.
(3)
Place hacksaw blade against hardened steel face plate of vise and use this
as a guide to cut through waveguide.
(4)
Place file against face plate and smooth off saw marks. Finish smoothing
the facing with the emery block provided. Remove the waveguide from the
cutting vise.
(5)
Remove all burrs with a sharp razor knife. Take care not to create a large
bevel on inside edge of the waveguide face. However, a 1/16 inch
(1.587mm) chamfer on the outside edge of the face will make the
connection procedure easier.
2 -- 38
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.4.2.7
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
(6)
Remove all scratches and nicks on the outside surface of the waveguide in
the area within one inch of new face (end). Use a fine file and emery paper;
do not remove any more metal than necessary.
(7)
Remove cloth slowly; be careful to remove all chips that are inside the
waveguide.
(8)
Cover and seal prepared end until a connector is ready to be installed.
Waveguide Support
Support the waveguide with standoffs or bulkhead mounting (customer supplied)
at a maximum of 3 feet apart. Also, support the waveguide on both sides of a
bend. Fasten the waveguide to each standoff.
2.4.2.8
Waveguide Cleaning
After the waveguide has been mounted and the transitions installed, the interior
of the waveguide should be checked, and cleaned if any contamination is
present. A vacuum with a soft head will assist in this procedure.
CAUTION
NEVER USE A METALLIC FISH TAPE OR
WIRE TO PULL A CLEANING WAD
THROUGH THE WAVEGUIDE.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 39
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.4.2.9
Waveguide Bonding
For general information about bonding, chapter 2.1.1.
The waveguide should be bonded to the earth, using the copper bonding strap
and associated hardware supplied.
Clean the surfaces where the strap mates with the waveguide and grounding
rod. Coat these mating surfaces with an oxide inhibiting compound. Tighten the
waveguide bonding clamp evenly. Connect the other end of the strap directly to
the grounding rod.
2.4.2.10
Waveguide Penetration Gland Installation
The structure penetration gland affords a weatherproof passage for the
waveguide where it penetrates a weatherproof wall or ceiling.
A 2--1/2--inch, (63.5mm) knockout hole 2--7/16--inch, (51.9mm) actual clearance]
is required for mounting the gland body. Paint the bare metal before mounting
the gland, using a zinc chromate primer. Apply a sealant such as butyl caulk or
RTV silicone around the body where it contacts the wall or ceiling.
Install the locking nut and tighten securely. Install the bushing supplied. Remove
cap and apply anti--seize compound to cap and body threads. Replace cap but
do not tighten until waveguide is in place.
After installation, paint all exposed metal surfaces with primer and a finish coat.
Run waveguide through the gland body with the bushing, rubber grip and cap in
place. After waveguide is mounted and strapped in place, tighten the cap to seal
waveguide. Apply sealer around the waveguide and cover cap.
2.4.2.11
X-- Band MTR Waveguide Installation
The X--Band MTR has the waveguide output port at the side of the unit, as
shown in Figure: 2--21 . This connection is a small X cover flange for hookup to
the waveguide.
Ensure that the correct hardware is used. To facilitate transmitter power and
VSWR checkout of the antenna system, a Bi--Directional Coupler (optional) may
be used as a means of connecting the MTR Down Transceiver to the Antenna
system.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 40
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
X--band MTR identification
Type lable:
Unit No.: M 28353 E01
Handling the filter element.
1) screw off all screws
2) lift off the filter unit (upgrade)
3) remove the styrofoam (shipping protection)
4) put the (in this case ) waveguide connector
and the filter unit together.
5) install the 4 screws
6) before fastening the group you have to
center it
Figure: 2--21 X--band MTR with filter upgrade
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 41
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.4.2.12
NSC S--Band Transmission Line Installation
The S--Band Pedastal female 7--16 DIN bulkhead connector mates to a 7--16
DIN 90_ elbow as shown in Figure: 2--22 . The MTR Down has a 7/8--inch EIA
connector output port at the top of the unit. The 7/8--inch coax kits are
configured with a 7--16 DIN connector at each end. An EIA Adapter must be
used to make the transition from coax to EIA at the MTR.
MK 2 ARRAY
PEDESTAL
BULKHEAD
CONN.
Pedestal
bulkhead
FEMALE 7/16 DIN
conn. female 7/16Din
90
90° Din
DIN (G625855-1)
MALE
MaleDIN
Din
Clamp
saddle
CLAMP,
SADDLE
G624437-5
MK2 PEDESTAL
BONDING
STRAP
Bonding
strap
MOUNTING
MountingPLATE
plate
MAST
Mast
CONTINUOUS RUN 7/8-IN COAX
RAYTHEON PRODUCT CODE
Continuous
M27544 = 1 METER
DIN COAX KITrun
M27545 = 10 METER
DIN COAX
KIT
7/8--In
Coax
M27546 = 20 METER DIN COAX KIT
M27547 = 30 METER DIN COAX KIT
HANGERS
AT MINIMUM
Hangers
at6 minimum
3 FT. (0.944 METER)
3ft.
(1
meter)
Kit of 10 each, RPN G261285-1
EIA/Din
adapter
EIA/DIN
ADAPTER
RPN G626505-2
EIA EIA
FLANGE
AND and
O-RING
flange
O--ring
MALE
Male
7/16-IN DIN, 90° CONN.
(P/N G625855-1)
Female
FEMALE
Figure: 2--22 NSC Down Physical Installation
3749DOC020302
2 -- 42
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.4.3
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
MTR Up/Pedestal Cable Installation
Cables routed from the MTR Up/Pedestal to the MTR must be properly
supported, especially for the long vertical run up the tower structure. Omission of
necessary cable supports will result in excessive strain at the cable entrance
point and, in time, cause the cable to fail. Additionally, the location of these
cables should not be such that they provide impromptu foot or hand--holds.
2.4.3.1
System Interconnection Cabling
The connections have to be made according to the respective wiring diagrams.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 43
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.4.4
MTR Down Physicel Installation
Install the MTR down unit using 4 each 3/8--16 (M10) mounting hardware is
recommended. See NSC Dimensional Drawing MTR X/S--band MTR Down
in the Annex from this Installation Manual.
2.4.4.1
MTR Bonding
For general information for bonding see chapter 2.1.1.
2.4.4.2
MTR Cabling
Cables routed from the Pedestal to the MTR, to the NSC and other associated
units, must be properly supported.
Cabling details see respective wiring diagrams in the annex.
For MTR, NSC Display and other associated MTR Down units internal
interconnection diagrams.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 44
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.5
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
NSC CAN-- BUS (Option)
For the CAN--Bus, following hardware conditions are to be prepared within
the NSC radar systems.
Connection Module (e.g. Connection Diagram 900--012.HP018)
Terminal Module U14
-- take out the resistor R1 -Interswitch Unit (Connection Diagram 900--020.HP007)
NSC ISW Controller PCB -- take out jumper B45 -Transceiver Control Unit
Transceiver Control Module -- take out jumper B19 --
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 45
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.5.1
CAN-- Bus Application
(CAN = Controller Area Network)
The NSC Radar Units can be connected with the CAN bus assembly (Figure: 2--23 ).
The transmission distance is maximum 400 meter.
Device 1
End--device
with terminating resistor
Device 2
The CAN bus is a Multi-Master-Bus allowing the connection of all devices and systems regardless of their task and function.
This means that any number of devices
can be connected. These devices must
be designed for CAN bus technology.
For the CAN bus it is essential that every
bus user is addressable via a unique address. This address is set within each bus
user.
Device 3
Device 4
Device 5
The usable address range is from 01(16) to
3F(16) (address 00(16) is reserved for development purposes).
Each bus user can send and receive data
via the CAN bus.
Device 6
The CAN bus must be terminated at both
ends via an resistor (125 ohms). This terminating resistor is activated by jumpers
on the respective PCB or by an additional
resistor at a terminal board.
Device 7
End--device
with terminating resistor
= terminating
resistor
Figure: 2--23 Principle of CAN bus technology
3749DOC020302
2 -- 46
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.5.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Connecting the CAN bus
For each CAN bus, a screened 3-core twisted cable with a conductor crosschapter of ≥ 0.5mm2 must be used.
All the CAN bus connections to be used are identical.
CAN Connection to a plug with termination
(End--device)
StandardCAN
connection to the
plug:
1 = CAN Low
2 = CAN high
3 = GND
CAN--GND
CAN low
CAN high
CAN Connection to a plug without termination
CAN high
OUT
CAN--GND
CAN--GND
CAN low
OUT
CAN low
IN
CAN high
IN
Figure: 2--24 Example for a CAN bus plug connection
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 47
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
CAN Connection to a terminal board
(End--device)
CAN--GND
CAN low
CAN high
CAN Connection to a terminal board without termination
CAN high
OUT
CAN--GND
CAN--GND
CAN low
OUT
CAN low
IN
CAN high
IN
Figure: 2--25 Example for a CAN bus plug connection
3749DOC020302
2 -- 48
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.6
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
SETUP AND LINKING (REFERING X-- BAND 7ft., 8ft LPR-- A25, 9ft.,
AND S-- BAND 12 ft., 12ft LPR-- A1)
This chapter contains drawings, diagrams and related material to illustrate the
setup and linking procedures for the NSC Pedestals and MTRs.
2.6.1
Safety
The following safety precautions must be observed.
CAUTION
CAUTION
WHEN OPERATING, THE NSC MTR UP, MTR
DOWN AND NSC DISPLAY (CATHODE RAY
TUBE) CONTAIN VOLTAGES HAZARDOUS
TO LIFE. HAZARDOUS AC VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT IN THE UNITS EVEN THOUGH
THEY ARE DE--ENERGIZED, UNLESS THE
PRIMARY POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS
HAVE BEEN TURNED OFF. MAINTENANCE
PERSONNEL ARE CAUTIONED TO
EXERCISE EXTREME CARE AND USE
COMMON SENSE WHEN SERVICING THESE
UNITS.
ALWAYS DE--ENERGIZE EQUIPMENT BY
TURNING THE MTR OR DISPLAY INPUT
POWER OFF BEFORE REMOVING PLUG--IN
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND
ASSEMBLIES.
CAUTION
SETUP AND LINKING SHOULD ALWAYS BE
MADE WITH POWER REMOVED FROM THE
UNIT.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 49
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.6.2
MTR Up/Down Set
The following paragraphs describe the procedures for NSC System Setup and
Linking.
2.6.2.1
MTR Up/Down Input Power Setup
It is mandatory that an Isolation Transformer be used with 115VAC output.
Function
MTR Power Input
Linking
None
Table 2--6 MTR Up Input Power Setup Linking
3749DOC020302
2 -- 50
Edition: 21.AUG.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.6.2.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
MTR Up/Down Pedestal Motor Power Linking
The MTR Up motors operate on 115/230 1Ø or 230/380--440VAC, 3Ø and
require configuration for the proper input voltage. Refer to chapter (1) for
115/230VAC, 3Ø input power and Para. (2) for 230/380--440VAC, 3Ø input
power for a 9--pole motor and chapter (3) for 230/380--440VAC, 3Ø input power
for a 12--pole motor.
(1)
MTR Up/Down Pedestal 115/230VAC, 1Ø
Figure: 2--26 illustrates MTR Up and Down Pedestal motor configuration linking
using 115/230VAC, 1Ø. Table 2--7 describes link positions. Permanent links are
installed on TB2--5 to 6 to 7, 9 to 10, and 11 to 12. These links must not be
removed.
Figure: 2--26
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
MTR Up/Down Pedestal Motor Linking (115/230VAC, 1Ø)
2 -- 51
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Function
Linking
115VAC, 1Ø
TB 2--7 to TB 2--8
TB 2--10 to TB 2--11
230VAC, 1Ø
TB 2--8 to TB 2--9
Table 2--7 MTR Up/Down Pedestal Motor Linking (115V/230VAC, 1Ø)
3749DOC020302
2 -- 52
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
(2)
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
MTR Up/Down Pedestal 9-- Pole Motor, 230/380-- 440VAC 3Ø
Figure: 2--27 illustrates the 9--Pole MTR Up and Down Pedestal motor
configuration linking, using 230/380--440VAC, 3Ø input power. Table 2--8
describes link positions. Permanent links are installed on TB2--3 to 4, 7 to 8, and
11 to 12. These links must not be removed.
Figure: 2--27 MTR Up/Down Pedestal 9--Pole Motor Linking
(230/380--440VAC, 3Ø)
3Ø MTR Up Motor Linking
Function
Linking
230VAC, 3Ø
TB 2--1 to TB 2--5 to TB 2--9
TB 2--2 to TB 2--3
TB 2--6 to TB 2--7
TB 2--10 to TB 2--11
380--440VAC, 3Ø
TB 2--1 to TB 2--2
TB 2--5 to TB 2--6
TB 2--9 to TB 2--10
Table 2--8 MTR Up/Down Pedestal 9--Pole Motor Linking (230/380--440VAC, 3Ø)
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 53
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
(3)
MTR Up/Down Pedestal 12--Pole Motor, 230/380--415/440--460VAC, 3Ø
Figure: 2--28 illustrates the 12--Pole MTR Up and Down Pedestal motor
configuration linking, using 230VAC, 380 to 415 or 440 to 460VAC, 3Ø input
power. Table 2--9 describes link positions.
Figure: 2--28
3749DOC020302
12--Pole Motor, 230/380--415/440--460VAC, 3Ø Linking
2 -- 54
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
3Ø MTR Up Motor Linking
Function
Linking
230VAC, 3Ø
TB 2--1 to TB 2--2 to TB 2--3 to TB 2--4
TB 2--5 to TB 2--6 to TB 2--7 to TB 2--8
TB 2--9 to TB 2--10 to TB 2--11 to
TB 2--12
380--440VAC, 3Ø
TB 2--1 to TB 2--3
TB 2--5 to TB 2--6
TB 2--10 to TB 2--11
TB 2--1 to TB 2--7 TB 2--12
TB 2--4 to TB 2--8 TB 2--9
440--460VAC, 3Ø
TB 2--1 to TB 2--2
TB 2--6 to TB 2--7
TB 2--11 to TB 2--12
TB 2--4 to TB 2--5
TB 2--8 to TB 2--10
TB 2--2 to TB 2--9
Table 2--9 12--Pole Motor Linking (230/380--440VAC, 3Ø)
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 55
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.6.2.3
MTR Up/Down Linking
CAUTION
(1)
THE MODULATOR PCB CONTAINS STATIC
SENSITIVE DEVICES. GRASP ONLY THE
PCB EDGES WHEN HANDLING.
Modulator PCB Linking
Figure: 2--29 illustrates link locations, Table 2--10 describe linking requirements.
JP1
JP2
JP3
Figure: 2--29
Link
X--Band
S--Band
Remarks
JP1
1--2
2--3
Sets Up Filament Voltage
JP2
1--2
2--3
Sets Up Filament Voltage
JP3
1--2
2--3
Senses Pulse Width for Filament
Voltage
Table 2--10
3749DOC020302
Modulator (A2) Link Location
MTR Modulator (A2) PCB Filament Linking
2 -- 56
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
(2)
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Controller PCB Linking
Figure: 2--30 illustrates link locations, Table 2--11 describe linking requirements.
Figure: 2--30
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Controller (A3) PCB Link Location
2 -- 57
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Link
Standard
Other
JP1, JP2, JP5,
JP10
N/A
Not installated
Not Installed
JP3
1--2
Enables
Antenna
Rotation
2--3 Storage --Antenna
Rotation is disabled.
JP4
1--2
Undelayed
1--2 used with systems that
Internal Trigger require a delayed trigger, i.e.
ESM Option.
JP6
1--2
MTR Up
Table 2--11
3749DOC020302
Position
Remove Link for MTR Down
system. Main harness
connects to J6 adding
interlock switch in MTR Down
system.
Controller (A3) PCB Linking
2 -- 58
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.6.3
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Initial Setup
1.
Prior to initial power--up of the NSC MTR, ensure that each component of
the system installed has been linked for proper operation.
2.
Ensure that all system circuit breakers are energized; all unit power
switches are in the ON position.
3.
If the radar system is being turned on for the first time, it will be necessary
to perform the setup procedures for the NSC Display.
CAUTION
2.6.4
THE SYSTEM MUST BE PROPERLY LINKED
PRIOR TO ALIGNMENT. THIS ALIGNMENT
PROCEDURE MUST BE PERFORMED IN ITS
ENTIRETY AND IN THE ORDER PRESENTED
TO ENSURE PROPER SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE.
Initial Turn On NSC MTR
1.
Ensure that all system linking has been accomplished, chapter 2.6.2.
2.
Close the breaker(s) supplying power to the radar system.
3.
Refer to chapter 3 of this manual when operating the MTR locally at the
MTR or refer to the manual delivered with the NSC Radar.
2 -- 59
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.7
MTR OPERATION (REFERING X-- BAND 7ft., 8ft. LPR-- A25, 9ft., AND S-- BAND
12ft., 12ft. LPR-- A1)
2.7.1
Introduction
There are no operation procedures for the MTR Up units. MTR Up unit must be
interfaced with the display to obtain the 15VDC System Enable to enable the
display to turn on. Refer to the Operator Manual.
With a display interfaced with the NSC Down, the MTR maybe locally controlled
at the MTR using two rotary switches.
One switch selects Remote (RMT), Standby (STBY) or Transmit On (TXON)
conditions. The second switch determines the source of the trigger used in a
particular range group, i.e. Short, Med1, Med2 or Long. In this position triggers
are locally generated within the MTR. When this switch is placed to XTRIG RMT,
triggers are applied from the display.
NOTE
The display must be on to obtain 15VDC System enable.
Figure: 2--31
3749DOC020302
MTR Down Control Panel
2 -- 60
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.8
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
10kW X-- BAND PEDESTAL WITH 6ft. ANTENNA
See dimensional drawing NB99--HP0048.
2.8.1
Pedestal (mechanical installation)
After the pedestal has been positioned properly on the mounting plate tighten
the four bolt securely.
Pull up the pedestal cover; loose with care the cover bolts.
The mounting details with all mechanical accessories are outlined in
Figure: 2--32 .
Pedestal
Cable
Gland
Figure: 2--32
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Pedestal dimensions
2 -- 61
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to the pedestal seal.
BOTTOM
HEADING
ANCHOR PLATE
SCREW M10X60
SPRING WASHER
WASHER M10
NUT M10
Figure: 2--33
Pedestal installation scheme
Pull down the scanner cover; tighten with care the cover bolts.
Be sure to avoid water infiltration.
2.8.1.1
Antenna
The following procedure must be used to install the antenna unit.
-- remove the protective cover both from the antenna waveguide and from the
waveguide transition on the pedestal
-- lubricate with grease the supporting base of the pedestal and the antenna
mounting surface;
-- insert the antenna in order to match the waveguide with the waveguide
transition;
-- mount the array assembly using four M8 x 30 screws with a flat washer and a
spring washer.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 62
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.8.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
X--Band Pedestal with 6 ft. Antenna (electrical installation)
Electrical installation consists of:
-- preparing and connecting the interconnecting cable between the
radar display and pedestal;
-- preparing the grounding cable of the pedestal to the ships hull.
To install the cable use the supplied installation kit. Use appropriate cable lugs to
connect the conductors to the terminals.
NOTE
2.8.2.1
Before you start with the cable setting--up procedure switch the pedestal SAFETY SWITCH to
OFF.
Cable Setting-- up procedure
Special tools:
Hand crimping tool for contact diameter f 1.6 mm
Refer to Figure: 2--34 and Figure: 2--35 for examples of crimping for standard
and coaxial conductor
(1) Arrange in advance 30 mm. of shrinkable sleeve with inner diameter of
25 mm.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
(2)
Insert cable through cable gland of the pedestal
(3)
Strip the cable for about 90 cm; collect the braided wire shields and
shorten it to obtain a length suitable to be tightened between the clamp
located just after the input cable gland. Push the shrinkable sleeve over
the wires.
(4)
Tighten the cable gland on the pedestal.
2 -- 63
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
(5)
Shrink the piece of sleeve in correspondence with the metallic cable clamp
and tighten it to assure a first fixing point of the cable in the pedestal.
(6)
The second fixing point is established by an adhesive plastic support
already present in the scanner unit.
The cable is fixed with a cable--stop band contained in the kit.
(7)
Strip all the conductors for about 5 mm.
Procedure to prepare coaxial cables:
strip the cables for about 5 cm, then separate the core from the shield;
roll--up the shield and protect it with shrinkable sleeve leaving 5 mm
uninsulated. Strip also the core for about 5mm. Crimp all the conductors
with supplied lugs for terminal connection.
With reference to Figure: 2--36 , carry out the connection with the
terminal boards J8 and J9 separating the conductors assigned to J8 from
those assigned to J9 with two cable ties for a length of 10 cm.
NOTE
Be sure that no pieces of conductor or other
pieces remain inside the unit after this task.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 64
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
LUG
CONDUCTOR WITH
STRIPPED END
Figure: 2--34
Fitting Lugs
STANDARD
CONDUCTOR
COAXIAL
CONDUCTOR
ROLLED UP
BRAID
TERMOSHRINKCABLE
SLEEVING
Figure: 2--35
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Setting--Up Coaxial Cables
2 -- 65
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Cable  14mm
Cable No.
1 -- 9
AWG20 conductor,
soldered copper, format 19x0.20,
isolated PVC 1,55mm max.
10 -- 21
AWG20 conductor,
soldered copper, format 19x0.127,
isolated PVC 0,94mm max.
22 -- 24
RG174 coaxial
Cable 
0.5
0.062
Cable Identification
Brown--Black, Red--Black
Orange--Black, Yellow--Black
Green--Black, Blue--Black
Violet--Black, Gray--Black
White--Black
Numbered from 1 to 3
Numbered from 1 to 3
25
Poly strip
26
Full shield
Soldered copper > 85%
27
PVC grey strip,
RMG label,
step 50 cm, ext. diam max 15mm
Figure: 2--36
3749DOC020302
Description
Cable installation to pedestal
2 -- 66
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.8.2.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Connection of pedestal terminal boards (J8, J9)
J8
Terminal board
Function
Conductor-- conductor
section (sq.mm.)
P.MOT
BLACK/BROWN 0.5
P.MOT
BLACK/RED 0.5
N.MOT
BLACK/ORANGE 0.5
N.MOT
BLACK/YELLOW 0.5
GND
BLACK/GREEN 0.5
GND
BLACK/BLU 0.5
+24 V
BLACK/VIOLET 0.5
+12 V
BLACK/GREY 0.5
--12 V
BLACK/WHITE 0.5
10
TRG--S
GND COAX 1
11
TRG
COAX 1
12
TRG--R--S
GND COAX 2
13
TRG--RTN
COAX 2
Table 2--12
Connection of pedestal J8 terminal board
J9
Terminal board
Function
Conductor-- conductor
section (sq.mm.)
ACP
BROWN 0.08
HL
RED 0.08
SB--OP
ORANGE 0.08
RAD 0
YELLOW 0.08
RAD 1
GREEN 0.08
MAG I
BLU 0.08
TN--IND
VIOLET 0.08
TN--REG
GREY 0.08
TUNE
WHITE 0.08
10
PM
BLACK 1
12
VD--S
GND COAX 3
13
VD
COAX 3
Table 2--13
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Connection of pedestal J9 terminal board
2 -- 67
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.8.2.3
3749DOC020302
Signals Description
Name
Description
Value/feature
P_MOT
Positive motor power
supply
+24 VDC + 20%
I = 0.3 A (typical),
10 A (peak)
N_MOT
Negative motor power
supply
--24 VDC + 20%
I = 0.3 A (typical),
10 A (peak)
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
+24V
+24 VDC voltage
24 VDC + 10%
I = 1 A (typical),
1.5 A (peak)
+12V
+12 VDC voltage
12 VDC + 10%
I = 0.5 A (typical),
0.7 A (peak)
--12V
--12 VDC voltage
--12 VDC + 10%
I = 0.7 A (typical),
1 A (peak)
TRG
Transmission trigger
positive logic
width = 10 VDC;
duration 1s
impedance 50
TRG--S
Trigger ground
TRG--RTN
Trigger return
TRG--RTN--S
Trigger return ground
ACP
Azimuth Clock Pulse
open collector
VMAX = 15 VDC; IMAX =
10 mA; 2048 pulses/revolution
HL
Head Line (North)
positive logic open
collector
VMAX = 15 VDC;
IMAX = 10 mA duration =
50 ms at 22 r.p.m.
2 -- 68
positive logic width between 5 and 10 VDC
duration = 1s;
impedance = 50
(always to be loaded,
also when not used)
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Name
Description
Value/feature
SB_OP
Standby / Operation
selector(see
Table 2--15)
open collector
VMAX = 5 VDC;
IMAX = 10 mA
RAD0
Pulse Width selector
(LSB)(see Table 2--15)
open collector
VMAX = 5 VDC;
IMAX = 10 mA
RAD1
Pulse Width selector
(MSB)(see Table 2--15)
open collector
VMAX = 5 VDC;
IMAX = 10 mA
MAG I
Magnetron power indica- voltage between 8 and
tor
12 VDC high impedance
TN_IND
Tune indicator
voltage between 0 and 4
VDC high impedance
TN_REG
Tune regulator
adjustable voltage between 0 and 5 VDC high
impedance
TUNE
Tune voltage
between 0 and 30 VDC
(12 VDC typical) high
impedance
PM
Performance Monitor
(not used)
open collector
VMAX = 12 VDC;
IMAX = 10 mA
VD
Video output
(negative)
4 Vdc peak; impedance
= 50
VD--S
Video ground
Table 2--14
Interface signals
Pulse Width
SHORT
(80 ns)
MEDIUM
(300 ns)
LONG
(600 ns)
EXTRALONG
(1.2 s)
PRF
FAST
(3200 Hz)
MEDIUM
(1600 Hz)
SLOW
(800 Hz)
VERY SLOW
(500 Hz)
Table 2--15
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Suitable frequencies for the TRG trigger signal
2 -- 69
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.8.3
Putting into Operation
2.8.3.1
Operation X--Band Pedestal with 6 ft Antenna
SAFETY SWITCH
The ON/ OFF switch Figure: 2--37 located on the pedestal is a safety switch
only, its purpose is to enable / disable antenna rotation for maintenance
purposes.
NOTE
ATTENTION
STBY mode (Display in STBY mode)
During normal operating conditions as well as
maintenance the antenna rotation can be stopped
by setting the safety switch to the OFF position.
Tx mode (Display in Tx mode)
The antenna rotation can be stopped by setting
the safety switch to the OFF position.
MICROWAVE RADIATION
Single RF Pulses are emitted every 20s for 0.5s!
SEE SAFTEY REGULATION at the beginnig of
this serice and installation manual.
Figure: 2--37
3749DOC020302
Safety switch on the pedestal
2 -- 70
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.9
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
PERFORMANCE MONITOR UNIT FOR X-- BAND (7ft., 8ft, 9ft..) AND S-- BAND
(12ft..) ANTENNA
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
The operator and maintenance crew in particular must
follow general safety rules:
-- In case of overload (due to short circuit or malfunction in
the units, the protective devices operate. In this case the
operator must switch off the equipment completely and
call in the maintenance crew. The operator must
not under any circumstances change the setting of the
controls and adjustments located inside the unit, and
must inform maintenance personnel of any abnormality
observed in operation.
-- Switch off the equipment during removal and
replacement of any malfunctioning component.
-- Dangerous potentials may be present in the units even
when the power has been switches off (for example,
charges on capacitors). As a preventive measure,
ground and discharge circuits prior to working on them.
-- It is advisable to use tools with insulated handgrips and
to wear insulated shoes.
-- Maintenance technicians must be especially careful
when performing measurements and/or inspections with
the radar switched on.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 71
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.9.1
PMU Installation Instructions
(1)
Open right pedestal access door.
(2)
Remove access panel above cable gland nut panel on pedestal.
NOTE
Panel may offer resistance due to the RTV used to make panel water
tight.
(3)
Clean RTV residue from pedestal.
(4)
Inspect PMU access area and if installed remove burnt orange color gasket
from access well.
(5)
Coat both sides of the conductive gasket that‘s included with the PMU
Cable with a thin coating of NO--AL--OX. DO NOT USE RTV.
(6)
Route PMU control cable through the 1 x 2 inch hole of the pedestal. Feed
cable assembly attached to PMU and seat conductive grommet, RPN in
PMU access well.
NOTE
The conductive gasket and cable are shipped as part of the PMU and
must be shipped with the defective PMU when the PMU is removed for
maintenance.
3749DOC020302
(7)
Place a thin coat of RTV around PMU mounting plate. Mount PMU in place
using four M6 bolts, RPN , four flat washer and four lock washers.
(8)
Tighten PMU mounting bolts.
(9)
MTR Up -- Connect cable to J8 on the Controller PCB.
Connect ground of cable to J5.
2 -- 72
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
MTR Down Pedestal -- Connect cable from PMU to J6 on the Power and
I/O PCB.
MTR Down -- Connect to J8 on the Controller PCB. Connect ground of
cable to J5. On early cable that do not have an ground ring terminal, cut
two pin connector off cable end that‘s being attached to the Power and I/O
PCB and splice a 6--inch wire with an ring terminal attached. Attach ground
wire to the nearest mounting screw of the Power and I/O PCB.
(10) Route and Ty--Rap PMU control cable to pedestal.
Attention
ENSURE THAT ENOUGH SLACK IN THE CABLE IS AVAILABLE TO
OPEN PEDESTAL COVERS WITH OUT APPLING STRESS TO THE
EXISTING CABLE HARNESS OF THE PEDESTAL
(11) In MTR Up, verify fuse F4 on the Controller PCB to determine if 1 amp fuse
is installed. If 1/2 amp fuse is installed, replace F4 with fuse, a 1 amp fuse
supplied with PMU installation kit.
(12) If MTR Down perform step 12a through 12d below.
a. Locate W7 control cable at the MTR Down Pedestal.
b. Connect W7 conductors associated with the PMU to TB4A and TB4B
of Power and I/O PCB (see Connection Diagram Performance Monitor
connection).
NOTE
If PMU is being installed to a previously install MK2, locate the tied back
cabling and connect conductors to MTR Down Pedestal using.
c. Remove MTR Down cover and locate W7 control cable.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 73
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
d. Connect W7 conductors associated with the PMU to TB4A and TB4B
of Power and I/O PCB, (see Connection Diagram Performance
Monitor connection)
(13) Secure MTR Down Pedestal access door (s) opened in step 1. Install MTR
Down Cover.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 74
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.10
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
PERFORMANCE MONITOR FOR 6ft. ANTENNA (PM30-- 02)
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
The operator and maintenance crew in particular must
follow general safety rules:
-- In case of overload (due to short circuit or malfunction in
the units, the protective devices operate. In this case the
operator must switch off the equipment completely and
call in the maintenance crew. The operator must
not under any circumstances change the setting of the
controls and adjustments located inside the unit, and
must inform maintenance personnel of any abnormality
observed in operation.
-- Switch off the equipment during removal and
replacement of any malfunctioning component.
-- Dangerous potentials may be present in the units even
when the power has been switches off (for example,
charges on capacitors). As a preventive measure,
ground and discharge circuits prior to working on them.
-- It is advisable to use tools with insulated handgrips and
to wear insulated shoes.
-- Maintenance technicians must be especially careful
when performing measurements and/or inspections with
the radar switched on.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 75
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.10.1
Configuration of the Unit
The configuration of the Performance Monitor PM 30--02, see NB99--HP004 in
the annex, is constituted by following unit:
-- SPM--010 sensor unit;
-- APM--030 local power source unit;
-- cable of interconnection between unit local power source and unit sensor;
-- installation kit.
2.10.2
General Specification
Applicable to radar set with:
Peak power:
50kW Max
Frequency:
9250--9500 MHz
Unit Specifications
-- Wide Spectrum Retransmission (no tuning required on the radar set)
-- Deterioration of transmitting power
Detectable range 10 dB
Detection step 2 dB
-- Deterioration of receiving sensitivity
Detectable range 12 dB
Detection step 3 dB
Power Supply
The power supply of Performance Monitor PM30--02 is 24Vdc.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 76
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Environmental Conditions
Operative temperature range:
Humidity:
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
from --15C to +55C and
95% at 35C
EMI
Fully compliant with IEC--60945.
Weight and Dimensions
For weight and dimensions of the performance monitor units NB99--HP004 in the
annex.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 77
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.10.3
Mechanical Installation of Performance Monitor (PM30-- 02)
This chapter describes all the procedures needed for a correct installation and
performance check of the performance monitor PM30--02.
The mechanical installation consists of fitting and fixing the unit.
The installation area must not be subject to high temperatures or exceeding
vibrations.
Fixing must be carried out to allow easy access to the unit for assuring the
easiest management of the maintenance operations.
For the mechanical installation, place the SPM--010 unit apposite to the radar
antenna (NB99--HP004 in the annex) and the APM--030 unit near to radar
display unit.
Dimensions and weights of performance monitor units are reported
NB99--HP004in the annex.
It is recommended to fix, in definitive way, the SPM--010 unit, only when the
installation procedure is finished as, in order to reduce the effect of the probable
reflections due to the surrounding atmosphere to the antenna radar, could be
necessary to vary the position of the same unit.
Refer to interconnecting diagram NB99--HP004 in the annex to carry out the
following procedures:
--
connect to sensor cable to J3 connector of APM--030 unit;
--
connect the contact switch cable to J2 connector;
--
Supply 24Vdc for J1 connector.
Contact switch is used for switch on and switch off remotely of equipment. For
this reason the switch present on APM--030 must be set on OFF.
Switch on radar and performance monitor and wait for 30 minutes at least in
order to allow both systems to become stabilised in temperature.
Put in transmission the radar on scale 24 Nm. and be sure that it is at maximum
tune.
The angular representation of 4 markers, for the reflections due to the obstacles
nearest to the radar antenna, can appear outlined; in order to improve the image
of the markers, rotate slightly the SPM--010 unit on itself.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 78
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
The trimmer VR2 allows to adjust, in fine mode, the performance monitor tune
optimising this way the image of markers on display.
The markers intensity can be varied adjusting the trimmer VR2; for this purpose
it is better to adjust the gain of radar receiver after warm up, so to obtain a floor
noise just visible.
Now rotate clockwise the trimmer VR2 up to the marker intensity farther from
centre is just distinguishable by floor noise.
The trimmer VR1 allows to adjust the markers distance by display centre,
rotating clockwise the markers come near to centre to step of 2Nm.
The distance from display centre of marker innermost, during normal operation
of transmitter, must be adjust to 14 Nm., moving the radar VRM to 14 Nm. as
reference.
Now rotate the trimmer VR1 counterclockwise completely, the 4 markers will
appear nearest to centre with angular width reduced, rotate again and slowly
VR1 clockwise up to the marker innermost shift from 12 Nm. to 14 Nm. If the
markers distance from display centre is always 14 Nm. and fails to decrease by
trimmer VR1, (the SPM--010 unit picks up a signal too strong), it is necessary try
to lower the position of SPM--010 respect to radar antenna, or to lower the
relative distance, or to vary of the SPM--010 inclination.
On the contrary, if it fails put the markers to distance 14 Nm. (SPM--010 unit
picks up a signal too weak), try to vary the SPM--010 unit distance from radar
antenna.
Now the installation is terminated; close the APM--030 unit with special clamping
screws.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 79
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.10.4
Electrical Installation of Performance Monitor (PM30-- 02)
Refer to figure Figure: 2--38 .
-- Connector NUVAL 3p.f.s.
--
24Vdc
Figure: 2--38
Wireing the Performance Monitor
APM--030
J1
NUVAL 3p.p.p.
Function
Conductor
+ 24Vdc
AWG18
24Vdc
AWG18
- Ground
AWG18
Table 2--16
Connection of APM--030 unit J1 for power supply
-- Connector HRS 3p.f.p.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 80
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
APM--030
J2
HRS 3p.p.s.
Function
Conductor
NO
AWG20
COM
AWG20
Table 2--17
Connection of APM--030 unit J2 connector for remote switching
-- Connector HRS 3p.f.p.
APM--030
J3
HRS 7p.p.s.
Function
Conductor
SPM-- 010
CABLE GLAND
(NH6 of PM510).
V12P
AWG20
GND
AWG20
V12N
AWG20
VEE
AWG20
TX_LEVEL
AWG20
RX_LEVEL
AWG20
Table 2--18
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Connection between APM--030 unit J3 connector and
SPM--010 (through cable gland)
2 -- 81
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.11
NSC INTERSWITCH UNIT (ISU)
2.11.1
General Information
The ISU can connect up to 4 MK2 Transceivers, additionally one 10kW Unit and
interswitch up to 8 displays in normal mode (chapter 3.4.1).
The ISU has two modes of operation:
3749DOC020302
(1)
Normal mode for free interswitching of up to 8 displays and 4 MK2 XCVRs.
In this mode the displays are sending the uplink via CAN-- BUS and the ISU
is generating the UPLINK and 15V enable to the XCVRs. The downlink of
the selected XCVR is routed to the respective display by the ISU.
(2)
The emergency mode (also ISU OFF); in this mode the first 4 displays are
directly assigned to the four MK2 XCVRs without interswitch capability. The
Uplink and 15V enable signals generated by the displays are routed
through the ISU without interacting of the same.(Dispays have a direct
galvanic connection to their respective display).
2 -- 82
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.11.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Setting up the NSC Interswitch Unit
Steps for correct wiring:
NOTE
Strip all cables outside the ISU wire strands may cause short circuits!
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
(1)
Open ISU
(2)
Locate terminal B2 and connect the CAN-- BUS between the displays and
the ISU in series, make sure the CAN-- BUS is terminated properly at the
beginning and the end.
(3)
Power up the ISU and one display at a time and observe the LEDs in the
ISU (Figure: 2--39 ).
(4)
There should be NO flashing red LED (if red LED flashing, reverse CAN-BUS on the display).
(5)
Deenergize all units and connect the transceivers (uplink, 15V enable,
ground) to terminal B40 observing the correct order/ numbering of the
XCVRs and downlink of the XCVRs to TB2 using BNC connectors.
(6)
Route a coax cable from the ISU video outputs to the corresponding
displays primary video input.
(7)
Energize the ISU and displays 1-- 4.
(8)
At the displays use the service menue, configuration, transceiver setup, set
the correct number of displays and transceivers, leave the tool and restart
the radar program.
(9)
Go back to XCVR configuration, enable at the primary input ISU and ALL
XCVRs, restart the radar program.
2 -- 83
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
(10) make sure the first display is marked as “A”, the second as “B“ and that
display A is master of xcvr 1, B master of xcvr 2, ......
(11) There should be no uplink fault indication on any of the first four displays.
(12) If an uplink fault is indicated swap the uplink wires of the corresponding
xcvr at terminal B40 of the ISU, the error should disappear.
(13) The interswitch is now working in the normal mode.
(14) Deenergize all units and connect the uplink/ 15V enable/ ground lines from
the displays to terminal B39 of the ISU observing the correct order/
numbering of the displays.
(15) Energize all dispays but NOT the ISU.
(16) Make sure all displays are assigned master of their corresponding XCVRs.
(17) There should be no uplink fault indication on the first four units.
(18) The XCVRs are now controlled by their carresponding displays via the
uplink generated in the display, the CAN-- BUS is not used to control the
ISU or XCVR.
(19) If an uplink fault is indicated swap only the uplink wires at the
corresponding display, DO NOT change the wiring to the XCVRs in the
ISU!!!
(20) The fault should be eliminated.
(21) Now the ISU can be energized and the system is ready for alignments.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 84
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
LED‘s
H1 two color LED
GREEN static
GREEN blinking
RED static
H2
RED static
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
-- indicates Operating Status o.k.
-- indicates Emergency Mode
-- indicates CAN BUS failure
-- indicates CAN BUS failure
H3
no function
H4
blinking
-- indicates Timer 100ms
LED frontside, two color LED
GREEN static
-- indicates Operating Status o.k.
GREEN blinking -- indicates Emergency Mode
RED static
-- indicates CAN BUS failure
Figure: 2--39
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
LED indication Interswitch Unit
2 -- 85
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
2.11.2.1
Aids to Troubleshooting the NSC Interswitch Unit (ISU) and the Transceiver
Control Module (TCM)
The ISU as well as the TCM has a mini USB port which is normally intended for
loading the controller software or upgrading the software
Nevertheless, these mini USB ports are active during normal operation and
output important data which can be viewed using another computer (Laptop)
with a serial COM port, the mini USB to DB 9 cable (Ident. No.: 1 505 283) and a
serial port viewer program like terminal or winmon.
The Baud rate is 9600, 8,1,N.
Different (fault) conditions will be displayed in plain text, below are some sample
recordings depicted.
S ISU, normal mode, B48, dip switch 8 to the down position, video power
disabled, no downlink present at any output BNC jack
(see Assembly Drawing with Configuration 900--042.HP100).:
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.328}ISW--Status: OK VideoPower OFF
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.375}SYS--Status: OK
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.406}VideoPower: OFF
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.437}
<0D><0A>
Relais: OFF
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.468}VideoOut 1: disable
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.500}VideoOut 2: disable
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.546}VideoOut 3: disable
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.578}VideoOut 4: disable
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.609}VideoOut 5: disable
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.640}VideoOut 6: disable
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.671}VideoOut 7: disable
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.718}VideoOut 8: auf VideoIn: 2
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.750}Offst Emer:+ 00.110 V
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.781}CAN Adress: 24
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.812}ISW BtrStd: 0000504:34
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.843} Neustart: 0000000025
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:38.875}CANTOD ges: 0000000000
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:39.421}<1B>[1;1HNSC Interswitch Modul (ISW)
3749DOC020302
2 -- 86
<0D><0A>
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Rxd 1:{22:26:39.468}Version: P0001 E00.02 Build: 05C5
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:39.531} MainPower: 23.485 V
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:39.562} Emergency: 23.386 V
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:39.593}-- 5V Video:-- 02.095 V
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:39.640}ISW--Status: OK VideoPower OFF
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{22:26:39.671}SYS--Status: OK
<0D><0A>
The present display/ transceiver connections are also visible:
Display 5 to xcvr 4
Display 7 to xcvr 1
Display 6 to xcvr 2
Display 8 to xcvr 2
Rxd 1:{08:47:20.297}18181:37:10 en: 5 to In: 4
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:47:20.487}18181:37:10 en: 7 to In: 1
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:47:20.687}18181:37:10 en: 6 to In: 2
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:47:20.727}18181:37:10 en: 8 to In: 2
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:47:21.048}18181:37:11 en: 5 to In: 4
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:47:21.238}18181:37:11 en: 7 to In: 1
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:47:21.429}18181:37:11 en: 6 to In: 2
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:47:21.809}18181:37:12 en: 5 to In: 4
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:47:21.849}18181:37:12 en: 8 to In: 2
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:47:22.019}18181:37:12 en: 7 to In: 1
<0D><0A>
Emergency Mode, Displays 1,2,3,4 to xcvrs 1,2,3,4:
Rxd 1:{08:51:55.773}18181:41:46 en: 1 to In: 1 OK Emergency Mode <0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:51:55.823}18181:41:46 en: 2 to In: 2 OK Emergency Mode <0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:51:55.873}18181:41:46 en: 3 to In: 3 OK Emergency Mode <0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:51:55.923}18181:41:46 en: 4 to In: 4 OK Emergency Mode <0D><0A>
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 87
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
S Similar results can be seen at the TCM:
10kW not selected, reset, warm up:
Rxd 1:{08:57:12.428}Status TRGRTN ACP HLtime TUNE TN_IND TCM_error <0A><0D>
Rxd 1:{08:57:18.687} 0100
---- ----
------
00000 0000
0000 0000
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:57:24.936} 0100
---- ----
------
00000 0000
0000 0000
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:57:31.185} 0100
---- ----
------
00000 0000
0000 0000
<0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:57:37.444} 0100
---- ----
------ 00000 0000
0000 0000
<0D><0A>
10kW in transmit:
ACP: 4096 pulses/ min.
HLtime: 2.26sec./rev.
Tunevoltage: 11.667V
Rxd 1:{08:59:15.786} 1110 01852 4096 0226 11667 2839 0000 0000 <0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:59:18.610} 1110 01855 4096 0226 11667 3029 0000 0000 <0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:59:21.434} 1110 01855 4096 0226 11667 3078 0000 0000 <0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:59:24.278} 1110 01860 4096 0226 11667 3113 0000 0000 <0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:59:27.112} 1110 01860 4096 0226 11667 3308 0000 0000 <0D><0A>
Rxd 1:{08:59:29.956} 1110 01863 4096 0227 11667 3376 0000 0000 <0D><0A>
For troubleshooting, the data stream needs to be recorded for a few seconds/
minutes and either analysed at once or sent to RAN via e-- mail for evaluation.
3749DOC020302
2 -- 88
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
2 -- 89
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
3749DOC020302
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
SETUP, TEST AND CALIBRATION
It is recommended to follow the procurement sequences.
It is recommended to note adjusted values in the
Installation Protocol (see annex).
Follow the items shown as configuration points CP....
in this chapter.
For doing this SETUP procedure you have to use
-- a USB keyboard (alternative On Screen Keyboard OSK)
-- a USB memory stick
-- PS 2 mouse
USB port *)
*)
the USB port built--in
depents from the
Console Type
Figure: 3--1 NSC
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 1
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.1
SYSTEM SETUP AND TEST
1. TRANSCEIVER Setting to define the transceivers
and displays of the equipment.
chapter 3.3.2
2. VIDEO SET/
TEST
Signal trigger true bearing and true
distance
(see also Video Levels a.m.)
chapter 3.4.4
3. USER PREF.
Setting of:
chapter 3.6.1
Pulse with
Heading line
Curved Heading line
Arpa Configuration
CRP
Adjustment of Transceivers:
-- Antenna high
-- Pedestal fwd/aft pos.
-- Pedestal port/stbd pos.
-- Transmission line length
-------
3749DOC020302
Zero range
Antenna Azimuth Offset
Tuning preset
Noise Preset
Video Level
Sector Blanking
4. COM--PORTS
Setting of data for all COM ports
5. DEFAULT/
TEST/SAVE
Includes:
6. ETHERNET
Setting of dataformat for the
ETHERNET interface
chapter 3.3.2
chapter 3.4.5 and
chapter 3.4.3
chapter 3.4.5.1
chapter 3.4.5.2
chapter 3.4.5.3
chapter 3.4.5.4
chapter 3.4.4
chapter 3.4.5.5
chapter 3.7.1
Installation test
actually not impleFactory test
mented
Extended tools (BITE) chapter 3.9.1
3 -- 2
chapter 3.8.1
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
START OF SYSTEM SETUP AND TEST
The service installation and setup menu is found in the STANDBY (step 1) condition – SERV.
For Testing the menus can be used in any order .
For Installation, at new building or adding new transceivers, follow the
chapter 3.3.2.
A keyboard is connected at the USB connector to enable entering LABEL data.
For software E0010 and later, a USB keyboard is not necessary, an on screen
keyboard (OSK) will appear.
step 2
step 1
Figure: 3--2
Start of Installation Setup
Setup menu can be selected by activating “SERV” (step 2), see Figure: 3--2
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 3
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
After Selecting “SERV” below mentioned Software--module has to be activated
by a doubleclick (Figure: 3--3 step 1).
step 1
.........
......
............
Figure: 3--3
Software module for Setup procedure
After selection of the Software--module the respective program has to be selected and started (Figure: 3--4 step 2).
step 2
....
....
Figure: 3--4
3749DOC020302
Start program for Setup procedure
3 -- 4
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
 Date and Time
This is normally always U.T.C.. User can also change it at the Radar Start
Menu.
 Configuration -- PASSWORD protected -- *)
This is for Radar SETUP (Figure: 3--4), Oscilloscope function and some
Built in Testing.
*) please contact our Raytheon Service Station
 Error Log
This is to save an ERROR RECORD to USB memory to send to Raytheon or
your Agent or to the Radar Store to receive later.
 COM Port (chapter 3.12)
Port Viewer tests all data coming into the computer before Raytheon software
tries to use it. In workshop testing, connect loopback cables from out puts to
inputs to use RUN.
 NMEA Data
This can be used to check real data inputs as seen by Raytheon Systems
from Sensors.
 AIS Server
AIS data can be used over a Network cable from ECDIS, or by direct input to
an COM Port. Normally use the RADAR CONFIGURATION menu.
This menu does the same function and is not necessary except for later
testing.
 Config RMG Console (used for Multifunction System only)
Special Multifunction System configuration for enabling a SYSTEM
MESSAGE OUTPUT and for configuration the NMEA ROUTE Telegram.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 5
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.3
THE CONFIGURATION MENU
3.3.1
General Information
This configuration menu is used for both NSC types (NSC 25 / 34).
The following Figure: 3--5 gives an overview to handle this menu.
menu register switches
signifying the displays in
the radar system
selecting the availably
transceivers for configuration.
display and transceiver
combination (interswitch)
video level oscilloscope
Figure: 3--5 Configuration Menu
3749DOC020302
3 -- 6
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.3.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Before starting the Configuration
PROJECT DIAGRAM (chapter 3.4.1)
It is necessary to know the Transceiver (XCVR1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) and Display
(A, B, C, D, E, F) connections. Consult the project diagrams, confirm which
transceivers (XCVR) are MK2 25kW/30kW and which transceiver (NSC) 10kW
pedestal are TCU controlled. The system is completely flexible. Change or
modification to the plan is always possible and can be done now.
Transceiver Control Unit TCU
A TCU interfaces a NSC 10kW transceiver into a combined radar system
(Mk2 25kW/30kW and NSC 10kW).
NSC 25 / 34
NSC25 or 34 can have two TCUs connected to Primary IN and Secondary IN.
A third is possible using AUX. input (special order computer from factory).
Integrated Interswitch
The Integrated Interswitch is used to route the downlink and uplink (XCVR control signals) between all of maximal 3 XCVRs (MTRs) and maximal 3 Displays in
the interswitch system. The advantage of Interswitch is “cross--over” function
when one display or monitor is defective or being serviced.
The maximal XCVR combination facilities are 2MK2 XCVRs and 1 NSC 10kW
transceiver.
Interswitch Unit ISU (option)
The function of the interswitch (ISU) is to route the downlink and uplink (XCVR
control signals) between all of maximal 6 XCVRs (MTRs) and maximal 8 Displays in the interswitch system. The advantage of ISU is “cross--over” function
when one display or monitor is defective or being serviced.
SETUP
It is necessary to set the complete ship system in this Installation menu at this
display and again at each other display.
There is no exchange of interface information over network.
NSC25 (10kW) or NSC34 (10kW) use Transceiver Control Units (TCUs).
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 7
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
To set the configuration follow the items shown as configuration points CP ... .
Figure: 3--6
3749DOC020302
Configuration Step One - Transceiver (basic menu for system configuration)
3 -- 8
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4
CONFIGURATION
3.4.1
Project Planning (Info and Examples)
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
The type of radar to be installed depends on customer requirements. NSC is
very flexible. Visibility is the first priority, and will determine where and what
masts are necessary. When radiation safety is critical, the NSC can set Blank
Sectors for any Scanner where no transmissions occur.
NOTE
NSC25 and 34 can take two TCU inputs as standard.
In principle, with workshop work, all displays can each be replugged to take 3
10kW transceiver (three TCUs for the NSC25 and 34), however this should
be ordered specially from factory or can only be done by fully trained Raytheon Service Personnel.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 9
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Example One
The system has two radars. Using Integrated Interswitch, any display can control
or view any scanner. Up to three Uplink/Downlink (2 MK2 and 1 NSC) scanner
types can be connected.
Display
Display
CAN BUS
Integrated Interswitch
Transceiver
MK2
In
Transceiver
MK2
In
NSC Video
Splitter
(U14)
Out
B14
Out
B15 B16 B17
Pri
Pri
IN
OUT IN
Sec AUX
IN
B14
B15 B16 B17
Pri
Pri
IN
OUT IN
Sec AUX
IN
Figure: 3--7 Passenger Ferry with 2 Radar
3749DOC020302
3 -- 10
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Service and Installation Manual
Example Two
The system has three radars. Using Integrated Interswitch, any display can control or view any scanner. Up to three Uplink/Downlink scanner types can be connected.
10kW
Display
Display
Display
CAN BUS
Integrated Interswitch
Transceiver
MK2
Transceiver
MK2
In
Transceiver
NSC
In
In
NSC Video
Splitter
(U14)
Out
B14
Pri
IN
B15 B16 B17
B14
Sec AUX
Pri
Pri
OUT IN
IN
IN
B15 B16 B17
Pri
Sec AUX
OUT IN
IN
B14
B15 B16 B17
Sec AUX
Pri
Pri
IN
OUT IN
IN
Figure: 3--8 Passenger Ferry with 3 Radars
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 11
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Example Three
The system has four radars but only two displays. Using ISU, any display can
control or view any scanner. If ISU power fails, it switches direct through ”fail
safe”. Then A will control scanner 1, and B control scanner 2 only. Scanners 3
and 4 will not operate until power is restored to the ISU.
ISU
123456
CAN
ABCDEFGH
In
Out
B14
In
B15 B16 B17
Pri
Pri
IN
OUT IN
B14
Sec AUX
IN
B15 B16 B17
Pri
Pri
IN
OUT IN
Sec AUX
IN
Figure: 3--9 Passenger Ferry with 4 Radars
3749DOC020302
3 -- 12
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Using Interswitch in the System
 General information using the Configuration Menu
Refer to Figure: 3--10
CP 1.
In this example, there are XCVRs set using the down arrow key, and
two displays on the vessel.
CP 2.
The button for A has been selected to name this display as A.
CP 3.
The XCVR count for This Display increases automatically in the connection
diagram. Initial is all XCVRs connected to Primary IN.
CP 4.
In this example XCVR 1, 2, 3, 4 and the ISU are selected.
CP 5.
The interswitch unit is connected to PRIMARY IN.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 13
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Software configuration
Hardware configuration
(Radar Connection Module NSC)
CP 1.
CP 2.
NSC Video
Splitter
In
*) NOTE
CP 3.
Out
CP 5.
CP 4.
B14
B15 B16 B17
Pri
Pri
IN
OUT IN
Sec AUX
IN
Figure: 3--10 Display A
NOTE for NSC Video Splitter
See Assembly Drawing with Configuration (900--020.HP016).
Connected or not connected data links (OUT 1, 2 , 3) has to be configurated
per jumper, see schedule JUMPER PANELS.
3749DOC020302
3 -- 14
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.2.1
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Interswitch Unit
Please look at Project Diagrams when an Interswitch Unit (ISU) is installed it is
normal to connect to PRIMARY IN on all displays.
However Secondary IN can be used for ISU connection, its a free decision.
All displays using ISU can taken additional MK2 (Slave) or TCU (Master) signals
on spare ports.
ISU
on Primary
Figure: 3--11
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Example with Interswitch Unit
3 -- 15
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.3
Transceiver Types
NOTE
MAKE A RESTART OF RADAR. CLOSE SERV MENU AND SELECT
“EXIT RADAR”. RESTART THE RADAR NOW BEFORE CONTINUE THIS
CHAPTER:
These details have to be entered at each display on the bridge.
There is no transfer of details from one display to the other by network.
In this case the NSC system can be connected to different Transceiver Types
with different settings in the configuration menu.
MK2 Transceiver
NOTE
for 8ft. LPR--A25 X--Band antenna select
7ft X--Band 25 KW
RRB  Radar Radio Beacon
PMU  Installed ?
EXTENDED GAIN (not used)
PERFORMANCE  P (default)
NSC Transceiver
RRB  Radar Radio Beacon
EXTENDED GAIN (not used)
PERFORMANCE  T (default)
MAGNETRON CURRENT
ADJUST  Pedestal motor STOPS
TRANSMITTING is possible
3749DOC020302
3 -- 16
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
OEM Transceiver
Special customer request
COMPOSITE  for Downlink complete
SEPARATE  Trigger,Video,Heading are
separate interfaced to
the Interface PCB
AUTO  not used
DO NOT DO
THESE FUNCTIONS
UNTIL LATER (chapter 3.4.5)
The SET CAN ADRESS button appears only for NSC 10kW
transceiver
Figure: 3--12
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Example CP 6.
3 -- 17
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
CP 6.
First the TRANSCEIVER TYPE is selected and a label entered if desired, but
this is optional. In this example (Figure: 3--12), a Mk2 pedestal.
IF USING ONLY MK2 PEDESTALS, GO NOW TO CHAPTER 3.4.4.
IF USING TCM OR TCU TO CONNECT 10kW PEDESTALS CONTINUE
HERE.
All TCM delivered from the factory are ready for connection as XCVR1 when inside TCU.
It is necessary to “program” the extra TCMs or TCUs as 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 or 6
onboard the ship.
This program function is using the red SET button (Figure: 3--12) and sends a
command from this display, using CAN BUS to external TCU (NSC25/34).
All TCM and all TCU are listening for this command at all times. Any display
can be used as a tool to program any TCM or TCU because all are connected by
CAN BUS.
CP 7.
Therefore before pressing SET it is necessary to have only one
Display and one TCM/TCU with power.
All other equipment must be powered OFF.
The CAN BUS must be connected in full, and terminated.
3749DOC020302
3 -- 18
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
TCM
to TCM / TCU
you are now
XCVR2
write using CAN Bus
telegram
Figure: 3--13
Example CP 8.
CP 8.
This example (Figure: 3--13), the local TCM or powered TCU is being
programmed as XCVR2. The label is optional and the choice of the Master
of the Vessel can be decided later.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 19
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Figure: 3--14
Example CP 9.
CP 9.
In this example, the local TCM or powered TCU is being programmed as
XCVR2. The label is optional and the choice of the Master of the Vessel
can be decided later.
For example:
Display B (any NSC) can be used to program a
TCU for identification as TCU/XCVR4.
When all TCM and TCU have been permanently programmed, it is possible
to switch power on to all equipment at the same time on the ship. If SET is
accidentally pressed again, while power is applied, then all TCM and TCU
will receive the same number. The programming procedure will have to be
repeated.
3749DOC020302
3 -- 20
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
CP 10.
Now select FINISHED, select EXIT RADAR.
Make a new start.
NOTE
When an NSC 10kW transceiver TCU has been programmed, it is not
necessary to program that XCVR TCU again from any other display.
When programming other TCU XCVRs later, that XCVR MUST be
switched OFF by removing power.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 21
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.4
Video Levels
All below mentioned settings and adjustments have to be performed for each
transceiver at each display. It is to recommend to note the settings.
CP 11.
Before doing this, the display must be restarted CLOSE SERV TOOL.
SELECT “EXIT RADAR” and choose RADAR RUN.
NOTE
If there is no signal trigger, the level has to be set to “400”.
After that the level adjustment can be set to the yellow line (as shown in
Figure: 3--16).
Before doing the zero range or noise level, it is necessary to have the correct
trigger level on the XCVR selected.
There are two possibilities (a, b) to find the optimal adjustments. We suggest the
second possibility because it is more comfortable to do the adjustments for several XCVRs. In this case the NSC software doesn’t reboot between the adjustments.
Step 1
press the soft button for selecting the VIDEO
LEVELS
Figure: 3--15
3749DOC020302
Example a) (CP 11.)
3 -- 22
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Information Panel
VIDEO LEVEL
adjustment window
Step 1
Step 2
oscilloscope for measuring
yellow
line
Step 3
Step 1
Figure: 3--16
fade in/out the
oscilloscope for
measuring
Example b) (CP 11.)
The function is an oscilloscope for measuring the level of the signal from the
XCVR that you are working with now. The tool will already know which port to
measure from the information already entered at CP 6. to CP 12. repeated
for a different transceiver.
Use the + and -- keys to set the trigger level to the yellow line
(as shown in Figure: 3--16).
NOTE
The Primary IN Port level can also be viewed at Primary Output using
an oscilloscope instead of this tool. The trigger level at yellow line is
equivalent to 5V trigger level (terminated 50 Ohm), or 10V unterminated.
It is possible to continue with the full setup for this radar, (CP 13) onwards, or repeat (CP 6.) to (CP 12.) for each XCVR. This choice may depend on shipyard
work and which pedestals have power and can rotate.
When EXIT has been pressed, the measurement has been saved for this display
for that XCVR only. The main radar will restart so that another different port can
be calibrated.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 23
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.5
Mk2 pedestals under use
Find the Common Reference Point of the ship for ECDIS or autopilot (chapter
3.6.1).
If there is no CRP, then it is normal to choose a central point on the bridge, for
example steering position.
Figure: 3--17
3749DOC020302
Example CP 12. and CP 13.
3 -- 24
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
CP
Designation
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Comment
CP 12. ANTENNA HEIGHT
can be set by click and slide -is height above sea level.
PEDESTAL FWD/AFT POS
+ = forward of the Common
Reference Point (often this is
chosen as the steering position
on ship center lines see chapter 3.6.1).
PEDESTAL PORT/STBD POS
+ = starboard of the Common
Reference Point.
TRANSMISSION LINE
LENGTH
length of waveguide used if
XCVR is MTR DOWN.
All 10kW and MTR UP = 0.
ANTENNA RATE / SCAN
is the normal speed in light
winds.
This is different for 50/60Hz
power and different for 10kW
VERY IMPORTANT FOR
pedestals.
CORRECT ARPA FUNCTION. Can be set by trackball using a
stopwatch, or the SCAN fea50Hz antenna rate is 24 rpm
ture.
60Hz antenna rate is 28 rpm
This reference speed is used
HSC antenna rate is 40 rpm
to detect if the belt or encoder
(HSC High Speed Craft)
slips to make ANTENNA
ALARMs.
ZERO RANGE
Adjustment of displayed distance versus true distance.
ANTENNA AZIMUTH OFFSET Adjustment of displayed bearing versus actual bearing.
TUNING PRESET
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
This setting is essential for
NSC--Radar. Is has to be performed in 4 occasions:
1 First installation
2 Magnetron change
3 Receiver change
4 Control board change
By this the tuning point is set to
the middle of the display.
3 -- 25
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
CP
Designation
Comment
CP 13. NOISE PRESET
VERY IMPORTANT
MUST BE DONE AFTER
VIDEO LEVELS FINISHED
3749DOC020302
This is to adjust the gain in that
manner, that also small radar
contacts are displayed but not
the dots caused by radar
noise.
PMU INSTALLED
For MK2 XCVR only.
EXTENDED GAIN
Normally OFF.
RRB AVAILABLE
This is used only for warships
and rescue craft which have an
receiver connected to display
helicopter transponder.
PMU
ON for MK2.
OFF for 10kW TCM/TCU
(manual, external PMU).
SECTOR BLANKING
This is to set sectors in which
no Radar transmission sectors
is sent out.
Value 0.0 is not accepted for
10kW (do not start a blank sector on ship’s head).
3 -- 26
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.5.1
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Zero Range
Figure: 3--18
Example ZERO RANGE
NOTE
It is to recommend to switch to “max 3Nm” range scale.
CP 14.
ZERO RANGE -- can be copied from another display where this data is
already measured for this transceiver. Or press SET.
Figure: 3--19
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Example CP 14.
3 -- 27
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Refer to Figure: 3--19
The XCVR is selected, the STDBY button is pressed to change status to TX.
The zero range is false. The Bank to starboard is not straight as it should be
compared to charts or visual. The Bank can be pulled to correct shape.
Figure: 3--20
Example CP 14., continued
Refer to Figure: 3--20
The Range Scale can be reduced, Parallel Index lines are useful tools to make
straight edges.
VRM can be used to measure and make a particular range.
The picture is correct when the Bank is not pulled, when it is straight.
Record this zero range to enter into the Transceiver Page on other displays concerning this XCVR.
NOTE
After Zero Range has been set, if radar presentation on ECDIS is not
correct in range, investigate the Common Reference Point settings for
radar and for position sensors GPS1,2 etc. in ECDIS.
If a scan converter (radar underlay) on ECDIS is not correct, check the
setup menus at ECDIS.
3749DOC020302
3 -- 28
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.5.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Antenna Azimuth Offset
Figure: 3--21
Example CP 15.
CP 15.
AZIMUTH OFFSET can be used from another display where this data is
already measured for same transceiver. Or press SET.
BEST METHOD
Refer to Figure: 3--21
The XCVR is selected, the TX button is pressed to change status to TX. HUP is
selected. Offcentre.
The best target is something floating in the same stream of water, 3 miles from
own ship. For example a tug.
This cancels the effect of drift, when we are in the same tidal stream, and makes
alignment easier.
The tug can be controlled by radio to move to own ship head.
This is easier than trying to steam toward the tug.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 29
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
SECOND METHOD
If no target can be controlled, or no target is on ship head, or own ship cannot
manoeuvre, or own ship is yawing; it will be possible to use North Up mode later.
For using North Up mode, the COMPORTS menu 4 is used to enable Gyro data.
Figure: 3--22
Example CP 15., continued
Refer to Figure: 3--22
An azimuth pylorus, or camera is used, with the same gyro as the radar display.
In this example a target is found at 329.1 degrees.
On the radar EBL1 is used to set 329.1 degrees, NUP set.
Azimuth Offset is adjusted until the video echo moves correctly to that bearing
329.1 degrees.
3749DOC020302
3 -- 30
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Figure: 3--23
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Example CP 15., continued
NOTE
This adjustment using North Up will be unaffected when own ship is
yawing or sea state is rough. The azimuth pylorus readout can discriminate to 0.25 degrees with an experienced user. Ask the Master for assistance to do this measurement well. Using gyro, because of Latitude, temperature, speed, there is always absolute error at pylorus and radar but it
is the same error. Therefore the method is possible but not as good as.
BEST METHOD HEAD UP (HUP).
NO METHOD
Never use a Chart with this NUP method to measure an angle from own
ship position. Using Chart readouts, the absolute error of the gyro will
affect the radar as usual. Comparison is not possible with true chart
information which has no error. Never use an ECDIS Radar overlay.
Never use a Chart underlay for Azimuth Offset adjustment in any mode.
All radar + chart presentations are affected by absolute gyro errors. The
radar is not at fault, the radar azimuth offset cannot be done using
those systems.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 31
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Never use AIS target comparison.
Azimuth Offset is complete using raw video and visual targets on ship head
or using pylorus. Later, if radar presentation on ECDIS or Chart Underlay is
not correct, investigate the Gyro. Latitude and Speed correction, the
condition of the gyro and consider service may be necessary for the Gyro.
If gyro quality cannot be improved, the ECDIS program may have Gyro
correction input for the user.
3749DOC020302
3 -- 32
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.5.3
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Tuning Preset
CP 16.
The radar switches to tune setup. The control of the tune bar is blocked and only
possible by “+” or “--” softbutton.
 Typical values for 10kW are 80 ...... 150.
 Typical values for MK2 is 127.
Figure: 3--24 Tuning Preset
NOTE
Be careful to ignore smaller tune points in the range 0 ..... 50.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 33
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.5.4
Noise Levels
CP 17.
Figure: 3--25
Example to adjust Noise Preset
Noise Preset is done for MAN and AUTO anti--clutter modes.
The radar should be Master (M) of XCVR. It switches automatically to 24Nm
and required pulse lengths.
Figure: 3--26
NOTE
The scanner will turn!
3749DOC020302
3 -- 34
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.5.5
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Sector Blanking
Figure: 3--27
Example to adjust Sector Blanking
CP 18.
SECTOR BLANKING is used to stop transmission only on certain sectors.
This can be for safety for passenger areas on some vessels.
This can be necessary because reflections from mast structures make false
indications.
After sectors have been done, a sheet must be given to the the Master
and in this book for each XCVR (see sector diagram for echo reflection in
the annex).
The Operator will be able to switch all ON or OFF in normal use, but not
able to modify the sectors.
(The radar will start up for the user with sectors blanked).
The blank sectors for each XCVR are best copied into each display for
each XCVR.
However, they are stored permanently in the XCVR itself or its TCM.
The displays SERV menus are used as editors for those sectors stored in
the pedestal or TCM/TCU.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 35
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.5.6
PMU Calibration
Take care, while performing the PMU calibration, you have to work in the Transmit Mode (TX), that means:
-- the Antenna is rotating
-- the transceiver is active -- microwave radiation -ATTENTION
Exercise care when approaching a rotating antenna. Also, make sure that
nothing or no one is near the antenna when turning on the radar power supply.
MICROWAVE RADIATION
A short exposure to the microwaves radiated by the radar antenna is harmless.
However, avoid prolonged exposure to the microwaves.
Never look directly into the wave guide while checking transceiver operation,
since microwaves are especially harmful to the eyes.
NOTE
PMU Calibration should only be performed if a replacement of the magnetron, Controller PCB, Moulator or Receiver has been performed.
PMU Calibration should be performed in good weather conditions.
Calibration should not be performed when snowing or raining.
3749DOC020302
3 -- 36
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
(1)
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
TX Cal
Select the PMU CALIBRATION button.
The PMU CALIBRATION window appears.
Switch over from STBY mode to TX mode.
Select the Tx softbutton. The Transmit Call is reset to zero. When TX softbutton is selected, it places a 3dB attenuation in circuit of the PMU
received RF.
Tx
Figure: 3--28 Example to adjust PMU TX Calibration
Adjust the radar controls as follows:
-- Adjust the GAIN for a light back ground speckle in the radar display
area.
-- Set the RAIN Rate to zero.
-- Set the SEA to zero.
-- Set the FTC to zero.
-- Place the range switch to 6Nm
-- Select Long pulse.
NOTE
The PMU functions only in Medium 1, Medium 2 and Long pulse. Long
pulse provides the best visual representation. The PMU does not function
in Short pulse.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 37
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Using the toggle field TX with slider (or alterative by “+” or “--” softbutton)
and adjust until the PMU it is just responding.
This is represented by narrow wedge or arcs approximately 5_ in width.
This is the TX Calibration width.
Press on the TX softbutton. The wedge or arcs will increase to approxi-mately 30_ in width for an X--band, and approximately 50_ in width for an
S--band.
NOTE
The width of the display arcs is a measure of transmitted power.
The Calibration of transmitted power is set for about 3dB down. During
normal operation when the PMU is turned on and if the width of the arcs
decreases to the Calibration width, transmitted power is down
approximately 3dB and service is required (Attention to the Magnetron or
Modulator).
3749DOC020302
3 -- 38
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
(2)
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
RX Cal
Select the Tx softbutton. The Transmit Call is reset to zero. When RX softbutton is selected, it places a 7dB attenuation in circuit of the the PMU
transmitted RF.
Tx
Figure: 3--29 Example to adjust PMU TX Calibration
Adjust the radar controls as follows:
-- Adjust the GAIN for a light back ground speckle in the radar display
area.
-- Set the RAIN Rate to zero.
-- Set the SEA to zero.
-- Set the FTC to zero.
-- Place the range switch to 6Nm
Using the toggle field RX with slider (or alterative by “+” or “--” softbutton)
and adjust that the PMU display arcs are just visible.
NOTE
The quality of the PMU arcs are a measure of the Minimum Discernible
Signal (MDS) of the receiver. The RF output power of the PMU is set for
7dB above MDS. If the quality of the arcs become broken while in normal
mode of operation when the PMU is selected, then the MDS of the radar
has decreased by 7dB and service is required (Attention to the receiver).
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 39
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
(3)
Store
Before storing the TX and RX calibration values you have to deselect all
softbuttons and numerical fields.
Figure: 3--30 Store the calibration values
3.4.5.7
PMU Review
PMU Review allows the operator to verify the current settings for TX and RX
Calibration!
Figure: 3--31 PMU Review
3749DOC020302
3 -- 40
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.5.8
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Operating Hours
Operating Hours allows the operator to RESET the Magnetron Send Time and
the Power On Time for the selected XCVR.
This RESET has to be done after exchanging the Magnetron (Magnetron Send
Time) or after exchanging e.g. the Controller PCB (Power On Time) in the
transceiver.
Figure: 3--32 Operating Hours
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 41
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.4.5.9
Finished
FINISHED means all details have been written into this display for that
XCVR.
Figure: 3--33 Finishing the User Preferences
3749DOC020302
3 -- 42
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.5
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
CONFIGURATION 2.VIDEO SET/TEST
(see chapter 3.4.4)
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 43
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.6
CONFIGURATION - 3.USER PREFS. -
3.6.1
User Prefs
USER PREFS -- User Preferences
Figure: 3--34
3749DOC020302
Example CP 19.
3 -- 44
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
CP 19.
These preferences will affect this display only.
These preferences apply to any XCVR in use from this display.
 DEFAULT PULSE WIDTH -- SHORT.
Some users may prefer to begin these ranges in MED1 pulse.
User change to SP is still possible in normal use.
NOTE
DEFAULT PULSE WIDTHS:
Will apply for all XCVRs the same, at this display. Other displays can
have different defaults. The display which is MASTER controls the use.
HEADING LINE -- Normally SOLID.
When a user requires to see video under the Heading Line, there is a key
on the panel HL Off.
CURVED HEADING LINE: When autopilot data is available, using ARCP
(Autopilot Remote Control Panel).
The radius and delay are automatically applied to the NSC radar curved
heading line feature. At the first version of NSC there is no manual curved
heading line feature when autopilot not connected.
Refer to Figure: 3--34
CP 20.
 ARPA CONFIGURATION
LOST TARGET:
CANCEL means a lost track will be deleted automatically after
acknowledging the alarm.
After one scan a lost track will be cleared.
COAST means a lost track will continue in dead reckoning at last
known course and speed after a warning. The user must delete.
A Coasting track will not be re--acquired.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 45
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Coasting assists the user to find a track that temporarily faded or
moved through blank sectors. The disadvantage of COAST is that
they continue tracking out to maximum range, even with no echo to
follow.
AUTO ACQUIRE RING LIMITS:
Some authorities required that auto acquire was limited to 3 -- 6 Nm.
Default is 0.25Nm to 20 Nm.
The NSC user has auto acquire zones, polygon, sectors, rings and
without limits.
3749DOC020302
3 -- 46
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
 SHIPS PARAMETERS
Refer to Figure: 3--35
1) Ships Hull
2) Common Reference Point (x / y) OFFSET
WIDTH
SHM
(-- )
CRP Y OFFSET
e.g. 120m
LENGTH
(+)
(+)
CRP X OFFSET
(-- )
e.g. 0m
3) Pedestal Position FWD/AFT and PORT/STBD (menu register switch
TRANSCEIVER see chapter 3.4.5)
TRANSCEIVER
SHM
(+)
PPI
PEDESTAL FWD/AFT
e.g. 3m
Pedestal
(0)
(-- )
CRP
(-- )
PEDESTAL PORT/STBD
(+)
Common Reference Point (CRP)
Pedestal Position
e.g. --7m
Figure: 3--35
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
CRP (Common Reference Point)
3 -- 47
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
 VIDEO OUTPUTS
Special customer settings.
Figure: 3--36
Default factory settings
 OSK
The On Screen Keyboard appears in the display.
Sequence of actions
Figure: 3--37 On Screen Keyboard
3749DOC020302
3 -- 48
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.7
CONFIGURATION - 4.COM-- PORTS -
3.7.1
COM Ports
(see connection diagram 900--012.HP013)
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
5 INPUT, 3 OUTPUT.
Ports 1,11,12,13,14,15,16,17 RS422 Input and Output,
There are no ports 2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
COM 2
INPUT COM 1
OUTPUT COM 1
(NMEA/AIS)
(NMEA)
COM 12
INPUT COM 12
(NMEA)
COM 13/16
INPUT COM 13
(NMEA)
OUTPUT COM 16 (NMEA)
COM 14/17
INPUT COM 14
(NMEA)
OUTPUT COM 17 (NMEA)
DIV.IN/OUT
INPUT COM 11
(GYRO )
INPUT PULSLOG
OUTPUT COM 15 (XCVR Uplink 15)
Figure: 3--38
Example (CP 21.) (COM Ports)
CP 21.
COM PORT 11, 12, 13, 14 OUTPUT are not used, not accessible, not
configurable except for loopback test programs.
COM PORT 15, 16, 17 INPUT are not used, not accessible, not
configurable except for loopback test programs.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 49
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
COM PORT 2 INPUT (Terminal module U13), 1+, 32-Can be any input data, but is the only standard port possible for
AIS @ 34800 baud.
AIS data can, as alternative, come from ECDIS or another NSC Radar
Display using the LAN.
ARCP data can be mixed with other data (e.g.
with Nav. Manager) and is automatically accepted.
DIV.IN/OUT
HEADING (COURSEBUS OVER SERIAL I/O)
COM PORT 11 INPUT (Terminal module U13), 2 +, 33-automatically reserved only for Raytheon Course Bus INPUT or Fast
NMEA (GYRO).
COM PORT 15 OUTPUT (Terminal module U13), 30+, 61–
automatically reserved only for Mk2 Uplink Control cables OUTPUT for
Mk2 pedestal XCVRs.
PULSLOG ON/OFF (Terminal U13), Status Input IN1, IN2, IN3
Examples:
SENSOR
LABEL (see
Figure: 3--39)
PORT
1.

LOG
 COM 2 RxD
2. AIS

ECDIS
Server
 ETHERNET
3. AUTOPILOT


ARCP
 COM 13 RxD, 16 TxD or 14, 17 or
 COM 2
4. ROUTES


ECDIS
 COM 14 RxD, 17 TxD or 13, 16 or
 COM 2
5. POSITION

GPS
 COM 12
6. VDR

 COM 2 TxD
NOTE
For ARCP bidirectional configuration, the label ARCP must be used.
3749DOC020302
3 -- 50
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
CP 22. Examples
DIV.IN/OUT
COM11 can be selected as COURSEBUS OVER SERIAL I/O.
COURSE BUS is supplied by STD 20, STD22 or NDR
Non--Raytheon Digital Repeaters with synchronization functions (ADITEL
products) make Course Bus. Raytheon Nav. Data Repeater (NDR) can also
make coursebus.
FAST NMEA is an international standard. Normal connection is by SERIAL IO
(COM11) (not used).
Special projects have internal connection to an RID pcb (normally only
military).
SLOW NMEA
If one of the COM Ports NMEA is receiving HDT or VHW telegram and has
been selected see chapter 3.7.3, and if all other gyro connections fail,
or are not possible, then SLOW NMEA can be selected.
The tracker is, then not IMO ARPA and the radar filter will not function to
best performance.
CP 23. Examples
DIV.IN/OUT
XCVR (COM15)
MK2 UPLINK
Unlike Mk2 RPU systems, the Uplink from NSC is not a
paralleled system.
is a dedicated uplink stream that will transmit to one Mk2
pedestal when this display is Master. It is also used to link
up to an ISU. Normally ON = X.
If this display is connected to more XCVRs using an ISU, its commands are
made by CAN BUS to the ISU and converted there to Uplink. If the ISU goes
power off, all the ISU relays switch the uplinks straight through, ISU 1 in to ISU 1
(A) out, ISU2 in to ISU 2 (B) out etc.
If this display is connected to another display without ISU,
and is set to Master of the other XCVR e.g. this display A controls XCVR 2, the
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 51
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
commands are sent by CAN BUS from display A to B and converted there into
Uplink commands. Therefore COM15 is only hardwired once to one pedestal or
the ISU.
The Uplink will only function in a connection to its primary XCVR whose downlink
comes to its primary input port (via Interswitch ISU or direct connection).
CP 24.
COM2 (1+, 32--), COM12 (3+, 34--), COM13 (4+, 35--) and
COM14 (5+, 36--)
INPUT ports for normal NMEA and/or ARCP telegrams 4800, 8, 1, N or
AIS 38400 baud COM 1 only.
Configuration for
INPUT (COM ..)
Label
Configuration for
OUTPUT (COM ..)
Figure: 3--39
3749DOC020302
Example (CP 24.)
3 -- 52
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.7.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Label
The label (see Figure: 3--39) at the top will appear in the User selection menus
for LOG or POS.
There are defaults values if not using a keyboard.
5 Characters maximum.
3.7.3
NCONN =
input from a Navigation Manager showing the Selected Sensor on
the Nautoconning of an IBS.
ABCDE =
Double clicking the label area with trackball and entering letters
with USB keyboard e.g. AP10, SAGEM.
Configuration INPUT (COM ....)
COM PORT DEVICE OFFSET -- The distance of the sensor from the Common
Reference Point. The CRP can be chosen as
the center of the bridge.
Distances are meters of the sensor from the
CRP not from the radar, not from the display.
x= *********, y=**********
For ECDIS data, the data is already corrected
for CRP, so the values are Zero.
POSITION (GGA or GLL):
NOTE
RMC sentence is not read by NSC
LOG SPEED (VBW):
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Speed through Water and/or over Bottom
ahead/port/starboard.
NSC does not auto select. User must select.
3 -- 53
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
GROUND VELOCITY (VTG):Normally from GPS. Bottom vector of Course
Made Good and Speed Made Good.
DRIFT and SET: NSC offers the user Automatic (VBW Water data is subtracted
from VTG Bottom data), or read NMEA, or enter Manually at
the PPI.
ROUTES (RMB): This is the ”lollipop” symbol drawing a straight line from own
ship to next waypoint. GPS data.
ROUTES (RTE, WPL): List of waypoint numbers in the actual route. Waypoints
from either GPS or ECDIS
ROUTES (ROT): This is another alternative method for the list of waypoints in a
route from GPS or ECDIS.
CHARTS (CHT; MRK): These are SENC functions coming from ECDIS
ALARM MANAGMENT (Input/Output): These are IBS system alarms from
central alarm system and Navigation Manager
CURSOR (CUR): This is the ECDIS cursor position.
NON IMO HEADING (HDT): (ARPA requires Fast NMEA or Course Bus.)
This is slow NON IMO heading alternative.
Normally do not use this (see CP 23.)
UTC (ZDA): Allows to receive a central time telegram (ZDA) from a central time
station in the bridge system (Universal Time Coordinated)
NOTE
For ARCP (Autopilot Remote Control Panel) no data types need to be selected ( the port is handled automatically).
But ARCP must be the label (chapter 3.7.1 CP 21. .)
3749DOC020302
3 -- 54
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.7.4
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Configuration OUTPUT (COM ....)
CP 25.
COM 1 (6+, 37--) COM 16 (8+, 39--) COM 17 (9+, 40--)
OUTPUT ports for normal NMEA and/or ARCP telegrams 4800, 8, 1, N
TRACK TARGET MSG (TTM) The track number as seen on the PPI with ARPA
data.
OWN SHIP DATA (OSD): The Course and Speed of the vessel as displayed
now by this Radar Display. For ships with NDR, and
no other digital data, this can be used to forward
data to ECDIS. However, with this method, the
radar must always be ON for ECDIS to show HDG
additional to GPS vector
RADAR SYSTEM DATA (RSD):
RADAR POSITION (GLL):
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
The Range Scale in use, the Radar Cursor
position.
When Dead Reckon is in use, ARPA has an
auto drift function for corrected/improved DR.
3 -- 55
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Figure: 3--40
3749DOC020302
Example (CP 25.)
3 -- 56
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.8
CONFIGURATION -- 6.ETHERNET --
3.8.1
Ethernet
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
LAN 1
LAN2
LAN3
Special
Projects only
Figure: 3--41
Example (ETHERNET --LAN)
CP 26.
The LAN connections are used in some systems to receive data
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 are not used in the Commercial Ship Installations.
Separate instruction are issued for special purpose.
No parameters necessary -- skip to CP 27.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 57
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.8.2
Network configuration for NSC PC’s
When a Radar takes a part in a network or connected to a hub, Raytheon do not
know which computer will be A, B, or C etc..
Therefore use this sequence to SET the addresses correctly at each display.
This work has to be done before using the ETHERNET configuration.
For doing this follow the next steps:
EXIT
RADAR
Enter
Pressing this softkey the RADAR Utility selector appears
Select Service Network Display in the RADAR Utility selector window and
press the button from the trackball again.
+++ RADAR Utility selector +++
Utility Selections
Operator Change Date/Time
Operator Close System and Power Off
Service Switch to Admin + password *)
Operator Refresh Radar
Operator Show Certificate
Service Raytheon Update from USB memory
Service Show Versions
Service Export Radar Display Configuration
Service Import Radar Display Configuration
Service Set Display Manufacture
Service Network Configuration *)
Service On Screen Keyboard
Service Service Refresh Fujitsu
Service VerifyTool
Service Set Voyage Data Recorder Setting
Run Selection
RADAR
Figure: 3--42 RADAR Utility selector
--Service Network Display--
3749DOC020302
3 -- 58
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
If you have no keyboard to do this configuration use the radar operator panel.
EXITing the
Service Display Network
SAVing the
configuration
MOVing in
Service Display
Network
SETting
Figure: 3--43 Configuration settings with the radar operator panel
Figure: 3--44 Available types for NSC Radar
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 59
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Figure: 3--45 Device parameter
Figure: 3--46 Save device parameters
3749DOC020302
3 -- 60
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.8.3
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
AIS Input to Radar using Ethernet
CP 27.
fill the AIS SERVER (IP/PORT)
DATA SOURCE
ECDIS 1 (Bridge)
ECDIS 2 (Chart station)
Radar A (as Server)
Radar B (as Server)
Radar C (as Server)
etc.
1.1.1.1
1.1.1.2
1.1.1.21
1.1.1.22
1.1.1.23
and
5000
and
X for AIS ON
Figure: 3--47
AIS Input to RADAR
Example
Radar configuration for AIS and ECDIS combination
DATA SOURCE
ECDIS
RADAR A
SERVER
AIS
HUB
AIS--SERVER (IP/Port)
RADAR B
1.1.1.1
5000
AIS ON/OFF
Figure: 3--48 Radar and ECDIS 1 configuration
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 61
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.8.4
AIS to Ethernet Output from Radar
CP 28.
fill the AIS SERVER (IP/PORT)
AIS SERVER
127.0.0.1
and
5000
and
X for AIS ON
Figure: 3--49 AIS to Ethernet OUTPUT from Radar
Example
Radar configuration for AIS
RADAR A
COM 1
SERVER
ENET
HUB
AIS
AIS--SERVER (IP/Port)
127.0.0.1
5000
RADAR B
AIS ON/OFF
ENET
AIS--SERVER (IP/Port)
IP Add.
1.1.1.21
1.1.1.22
1.1.1.23
1.1.1.24
1.1.1.25
Display
Radar A
Radar B
Radar C
Radar D
Radar E
1.1.1.21
5000
AIS ON/OFF
Figure: 3--50 Radar configuration for AIS
3749DOC020302
3 -- 62
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.9
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
CONFIGURATION 5. DEFAULTS / TESTS / SAVE
CP 29.
Normally no tests are necessary for normal installation.
If use of the System indicates a video problem –
Check the TCM and TCU were all programmed correctly (see CP 7.
CP 8. CP 9.) and repeat the VIDEO SET/TEST.
Check the downlinks and the correct level for triggers (see CP 11.).
If use of the System indicates a Course Bus problem,
Check the wiring,
Check that the Gyro Latitude and Speed corrections have been set at the
Gyro Control Panel.
Use some other Course Bus receiver, such as a PC test program or Digital
Repeater to test the signal.
NOTE
The GYRO STD20 / 22 must be fully warmed up for Radar.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 63
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.9.1
Defaults / Tests / Save
(Figure: 3--51)
Figure: 3--51
DEFAULTS / TEST / SAVE window
INSTALLATION TESTS
COMMUNICATION TEST
in the moment not available
VERSION INFORMATION
is an software development information window only
3749DOC020302
3 -- 64
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS
ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS (Password --call Raytheon Product Support)
If no video is seen on the system the ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS has to be
used.
INSTALLATION DATA
SAVE BACKUP OF ALL WORK
When Radar configuration is finished the SAVE BACKUP OF ALL WORK
MUST be used.
Special link to the RADAR Utility selector window
When the ship has sailed, if the Deck Officer thinks some problem has
occurred after some time he can press Operator Refresh Radar.
This will immediately set the radar again to the condition of the backup
(except the Date / Time continue as normal).
In this way, the ship Captain or Service Engineer can always go back to a
good configuration before running the Radar.
EXIT
RADAR
Left
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
For doing this follow the next steps:
Pressing this softkey the RADAR Utility selector appears
Select Operator Refresh Radar in the RADAR Utility selector window and
press the button from the trackball again.
3 -- 65
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
+++ RADAR Utility selector +++
Utility Selections
Operator Change Date/Time
Operator Close System and Power Off
Service Switch to Admin + password *)
Operator Refresh Radar
Operator Show Certificate
Service Raytheon Update from USB memory
Service Show Versions
Service Export Radar Display Configuration
Service Import Radar Display Configuration
Figure: 3--52 RADAR Utility selector
--Operator Refresh Radar -LOAD DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
The NSC is delivered with defaults already loaded. LOAD DEFAULTS is not
necessary for normal installation.If installation is in error and needs to be
corrected, this can be done using the normal menus above.
LOAD DEFAULTS is not necessary to correct things.If it is decided to begin
again completely from fresh, or as part of a major overhaul, loading defaults
can be used.
Pressing LOAD DEFAULTS will shut down NSC and load a completely new
empty configuration file, as from factory.
NSC will reboot/restart or must be powered down and powered ON again by
the engineer.
SERVICE REPORTS
DELETE OLD REPORTS
If you press this softbutton OLD REPORTS will be deleted.
MAKE REPORT FILE
If you press this softbutton the radar software creates a REPORT FILE from
the current software situation. Its advantage is to send this REPORT FILE to
the Raytheon SERVICE center by mail.
3749DOC020302
3 -- 66
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
For reading out this file you have to change into RADAR Utility selector
(see Figure: 3--52).
Prepare the USB stick on a PC with a directory ..\RAYTHEON.
Insert a USB memory stick into the Radar USB connection and press
Service Report to USB, as shown before.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 67
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.10
SERVICE EXPORT/IMPORT RADAR DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
For reading out or in the Radar Display Configuration for one Display (A, B, C,
etc.) you have to change into RADAR Utility selector.
+++ RADAR Utility selector +++
Utility Selections
Operator Change Date/Time
Operator Close System and Power Off
Service Switch to Admin + password *)
Operator Refresh Radar
Operator Show Certificate
Service Raytheon Update from USB memory
Service Show Versions
Service Export Radar Display Configuration
Service Import Radar Display Configuration
Figure: 40 RADAR Utility selector
--Service Export/Import Radar Display Configuration-Prepare the USB stick on a PC with a directory ..\RAYTHEON.
Insert a USB memory stick into the Radar USB connection and press
Service ,Export/ Radar Display Configuration.
S Service ExportRadar Display Configuration dialog.
Figure: 41 Service Export Radar Display Configuration
3749DOC020302
3 -- 68
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
This display shows a Radar Display Configuration example.
Figure: 42 Radar Display Configuration example
S Service Import Radar Display Configuration dialog.
Figure: 43 Service Import Radar Display Configuration
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 69
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.11
VOYAGE DATA RECORDER INTERFACE SETTINGS
The VDR Radar Interface is used to adapt a Voyage Data Recorder to NSC.
The radar picture is transfer by ethernet technology.
The radar pictures will be generate in BMP format.
The pictures compressed in GNU--zip algorithms.
For starting the Service Set Voyage Data Record Settings you have to change
into RADAR Utility selector (password protected).
+++ RADAR Utility selector +++
Utility Selections
Operator Change Date/Time
Operator Close System and Power Off
Service Switch to Admin + password *)
Operator Refresh Radar
Operator Show Certificate
Service Raytheon Update from USB memory
Service Show Versions
Service Export Radar Display Configuration
Service Import Radar Display Configuration
Service Set Display Manufacture
Service Network Configuration *)
Service On Screen Keyboard
Service Service Refresh Fujitsu
Service VerifyTool
Service Set Voyage Data Recorder Setting *)
Run Selection
RADAR
*) password protected
Figure: 44 RADAR Utility selector
--Service Set Voyage Data Recorder Setting--
3749DOC020302
3 -- 70
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
VDR IP address
this information is comming from the VDR
manufactor.
VDR Port Number
this information is comming from the VDR
manufactor.
RADAR 1 for A
RADAR 2 for B
RADAR 3 for C
etc.
Figure: 45 Radar Image Transmitter Control
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 71
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.12
COM PORT (Test)
This procedure has to be select for testing the COM PORTS.
There are two tests possible:
-- LOOP--AROUND test (see Figure: 3--54 step 1)
This test needs loopback links on all COM PORTS (RX / TX) to check the
NSC hardware.
-- NMEA test (see Figure: 3--54 step 2)
This test reads out the NMEA input data per PORT VIEWER.
After selection the Software--module the respective program has to be selected
and started.
........
..........
Figure: 3--53
3749DOC020302
Start program for COM PORT
3 -- 72
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Service and Installation Manual
step 2
step 1
STOP *)
CLEAR
FILTER
*) STOP the running process
CLEAR the display
FILTER select the COM PORT
Figure: 3--54
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
COM PORT is running
3 -- 73
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.13
CONFIGURATION AIS SERVER
The AIS system can be configurate via serial Com Port or via Ethernet (chapter
3.8.3 and 3.8.4).
3.13.1
AIS configuration via serial Com Port
The AIS server allocation depends from the project plan.
AIS
**)
*)
Booster
Radar A
Server
Radar B
Server
Ethernet
Radar C
Server
Ethernet
*) in this case Radar A should be used as server.
Radar B and C configured via Ethernet (chapter 3.8.4)
**)in this case Radar A, B, C should be used as server.
Figure: 3--55 AIS configuration (example)
3749DOC020302
3 -- 74
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
After selection the Software--module the respective program has to be
selected and started.
........
..........
Figure: 3--56 Start program for AIS Server
step 2
select Conf. Server
step 1
select Enable
using EThernet
edit IP 127.0.0.1
step 3
select AIS Com Port
COM3,4,5 for processor A320 (chartradar)
COM2 for processor A3300
step 4
select OK
Figure: 3--57 AIS Server configuration (1)
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 75
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
step 5
select Reset Server
step 6
select Check Server
After doing all settings EXIT RADAR,
switch OFF ....... ON the Radar.
EXIT
RADAR
step 7
select EXIT RADAR
Figure: 3--58 AIS Server configuration (2)
3749DOC020302
3 -- 76
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.14
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
CONFIG RMG CONSOLE
Special configuration to enable a SYSTEM MESSAGE OUTPUT and
to configure the NMEA ROUTE Telegram (Figure: 3--59 and Figure: 3--60).
SYSTEM MESSAGE OUTPUT
The status telegram $PANZSYS is used as actual operating state information for
external or combined units as e.g. Radar and Nautoconning or ECDIS.
Select the check box Enable (step 1), the telegram can be send after selecting
the Port COM1 ...... LAN3.
NMEA Route Configuration
This configuration part permits the configuration from the RTE Message Mode
and the RTE Timeout.
RTE Message Mode
The RTE Message Mode is used to configurate the NMEA route transfer from
the position receiver (GPS) to this radar (step 2).
Telegram types $----RTE and $----WPL.
Auto identification means;
The radar receives the route telegram ($----RTE). It is possible to transfer
the “working route” or the “complete route”.
complete route
current position
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 77
working route
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Working route;
The radar receives only the “working route”.
NOTE
This configuration must be used for Furuno-- GPS-- Receiver.
Complete route;
The radar receives only the “complete route”.
RTE Timeout
The RTE Timeout configuration is used to check the complete route ($----RTE
and $----WPL) dependency on the GPS activities.
Select the check box Enable (step 3), the GPS activities will be checked.
dependency on the RTE Timeout (default = 90s).
If the data transfer stops for longer than 90s the complete route will be
deleted from the radar PPI.
Without this timeout routine the complete route will be display in the Radar
PPI until a new route has been transmitted or until the Radar switches ON/
OFF.
3749DOC020302
3 -- 78
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
After selection of the Software--module the respective program has to be selected and started.
........
..........
Figure: 3--59 Select Config RMG Console
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 79
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
step 1
step 2
step 3
Figure: 3--60 RMG Console Console
3749DOC020302
3 -- 80
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3.14.1
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Multifunctional Console MFC Configuration
All applications/ consoles can be color synchronized, i.e. if one console is
changing form day to night colors all consoles will follow. The consoles can be
grouped with the effect, that only consoles belonging to the same group will
follow the synchronization.
MFC Configuration
Figure: 3--61 MFC Configuration
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
3 -- 81
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
3749DOC020302
3 -- 82
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
SERVICE AND ALIGNMENT
4.1
PEDESTAL - X-- BAND AND S-- BAND - MTR UP
4.1.1
PCB Adjustments
4.1.1.1
Coarse Tune Adjustment (Controller PCB)
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
NOTE
The Coarse Tune adjustment is factory set and is normally not required
unless a problem is suspected, or the Controller PCB, Receiver, LNFE or
Magnetron have been replaced. If the tuning control is correct at the Display, it is NOT necessary to accomplish this procedure
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
(1)
At the pedestal place the Antenna Safety switch to OFF to prevent accidental antenna rotation and transmission. Open the left access door using a
10mm socket to gain access to the Controller PCB mounted on the inside
of the door.
(2)
Locate JP3 on the Controller PCB and link JP3 2--3 to disable antenna
rotation. Rotate the array away from personnel. Locate JP4 on the Controller PCB and remove the jumper.
Place the Antenna Safety switch to ON to enable the transmitter.
(3)
Locate TP13 on the Controller PCB, see Figure: 4--1. Using a Oscilloscope,
carefully place probe to TP13.
(4)
Locate R4 (Coarse Tune) on the Controller PCB, Figure: 4--1, and adjust
R4 fully CW, then rotate CCW for first video peak.
(5)
Locate R12 (Tune Bar Deflection Adjustment) on the Receiver assembly
and adjust R12 for a tune bar deflection of 5 to 7 divisions.
(6)
No further adjustments are required, disconnect test leads from the Controller PCB.
4 -- 1
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
(7)
Place the Antenna Safety switch to OFF.
(8)
Locate JP3 on the Controller PCB remove 2--3 (see step (2)) and link 1--2
to enable antenna rotation. Locate JP4 and link jumper again.
(9)
Close the left access door of pedestal.
WARNING
ANTENNA WILL ROTATE WHEN THE ANTENNA SAFETY
SWITCH IS TURNED ON.
(10) Placing the Antenna Safety switch to ON to enable antenna rotation and
transmission.
3749DOC020302
4 -- 2
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Figure: 4--1 Controller PCB Coarse Tune Adjustment
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 3
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.1.2
Modulator PCB (Mag I) Adjustment for X-- Band and S-- Band
After changing the magnetron please follow these adjustment points.
NOTE
Before starting with the adjustment the magnetron has been
preheating approx. 30 min. by switching the Radar System into the
STAND BY MODE.
3749DOC020302
(1)
At the MTR, place the Antenna Safety switch to OFF to prevent accidental
antenna rotation and transmission. Open the right access door using a
10 mm socket to gain access to the Modulator PCB mounted on the inside
of the door.
(2)
Locate Link JP3 on the Controller PCB and link JP3 2--3 to disable antenna
rotation. Rotate the array away from personnel. Place the Antenna
Safety switch to ON to enable the transmitter.
(3)
Place DVM positive lead to the U11 side of R62 or TP 1 on the Modulator
PCB and negative lead to chassis ground, Figure: 4--2.
(4)
On the Modulator PCB, locate and adjust R56 (MAG I ADJ) for 2.8V DC S-Band and 3.2V DC X--Band.
(5)
Now turn the potentiometer on the Reference Adjust Board (Fig. 5) slowly
to the left and watch the voltage level of TP 1. As soon as the voltage decreases markedly (2.75 V or 3.15 V), the potentiometer must be slightly
turned back until the corresponding values (2.8 V DC for S--Band and 3.2 V
DC for X--Band) re--adjust.
(6)
Place the Antenna Safety switch to OFF.
(7)
Locate Link JP3 on the Controller PCB and link JP3 1--2 to enable antenna
rotation.
(8)
Remove test leads and secure doors and access panels.
4 -- 4
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
WARNING
ANTENNA WILL ROTATE WHEN THE ANTENNA SAFETY
SWITCH IS TURNED ON.
(9)
Place the Antenna Safety switch to ON.
This completes the MTR adjustments.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 5
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
Reference Adjust Board
with Potentiometer
R56
TP1
TP3
TP9
Figure: 4--2 Modulator PCB MAG I Adjustment and Reference Adjust Board
3749DOC020302
4 -- 6
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
X/S-- Band MTR Up Disassembly
Before replacing the assemblies or PCBs, it is necessary to set the power supply
to OFF. The following procedures for removing and replacement of assemblies/
PCBs should be followed:
WARNING
BEFORE REPLACING THE ASSEMBLIES OF THE MTR, SET
THE POWER TO OFF AND SECURE POWER TO THE MTR AT
THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
Oil level sight gage
OIL LEVEL SIGHT GAGE
Oil
drainPLUG
plug
OIL DRAIN
ON
OFF
Antenna safety switch
ANTENNA SAFETY SWITCH
PEDESTAL
GROUND STRAP
Pedestal
ground
strap
Figure: 4--3 Main Pedestal Views
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 7
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.3
X/S--Band Connector Bracket (A9), 1, Removal
(1)
Release 12 captive screws and open the right--side pedestal cover. Power
is present at MTR TB1--1,--2,--3 and Motor TB1--8,--9,--10.
(2)
Identify, tag, and remove all lugs bringing in the AC Line Power for the MTR
at TB1--1,--2,--3 and Motor, TB1--8,--9,--10.
(3)
Loosen the two screws (a counter--sunk phillips on the left, a hex head
holding the Power and I/O mounting bracket on the right) at the bottom of
the Contactor Bracket.
(4)
Remove two screws at the top of the Contactor Bracket.
(5)
Lower the Contactor Bracket for access to the wires.
(6)
Identify, tag, and remove the spade lugs from the following:
Rear of A9TB2 connected to yellow Motor circuit wires.
Rear of A9TB1--1 and --8 connected to the green ground wire.
Fuse wires (115 VAC) connected to the fuse holder collar lug on A9F1
(black) and A9F2 (white).
For 1/2 HP motor: Contactor Relay (A9K1) coil supply wires on the relay
lug contacts ’A’ (red) and ’B’ (brown) leading from the Power I/O PCB
(A1J8).
For 1 HP motor: Contactor Relay (A9K1) coil supply wires on the
relay lug contacts ’1’ (red) and ’2’ (brown) leading from the Power I/O
PCB (A1J8).
3749DOC020302
(7)
Remove the Contactor Bracket.
(8)
Install the Contactor Bracket by reversing the removal procedures.
4 -- 8
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
WARNING
When replacing a Contactor Bracket check linking according to
Motor Voltage, Power Phase and Horse Power installed.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 9
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.4
X/S-- Band Contactor Bracket (A9), 3Ø, Removal
(1)
Release 12 captive screws and open the right--side pedestal cover.
(2)
Identify, tag, and remove all lugs bringing in the AC Line Power for the MTR
at TB1--1,--2,--3 and the Motor at Relay K1, lugs L1, L2, L3 and TB1--3
(GND).
(3)
Loosen the two screws (counter--sunk phillips on left, hex head holding
Power and I/O mounting bracket on right) at the bottom of the Contactor
Bracket.
(4)
Remove two screws at top of the Contactor Bracket.
(5)
Lower the Contactor Bracket for access to the wires.
(6)
Identify, tag, and remove the spade lugs from the following:
Rear of A9TB2 connected to yellow Motor circuit wires.
Rear of A9TB1--3 connected to the green ground wire.
Fuse wires (115 VAC) connected to the fuse holder collar lug on A9F1
(black) and A9F2 (white).
Contactor Relay (A9K1) coil supply wires on the relay lug contacts A1 (red)
and A2 (brown) leading from the Power I/O PCB (A1J8).
(7)
Remove the Contactor Bracket.
(8)
Install the Contactor Bracket by reversing the removal procedures.
NOTE
When replacing a Contactor Bracket check linking according to
Motor Voltage, Power Phase and Horse Power installed..
3749DOC020302
4 -- 10
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.5
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Power I/O PCB (A1) Removal
(1)
Loosen 24 captive screws and open both pedestal covers.
(2)
Identify, tag, and remove all connectors from the Power and I/O PCB.
(3)
Lower the Contactor Bracket as detailed in Steps 1 through 5 of chapter
4.1.4 or chapter 4.1.4 to gain access to the left side of the Power and I/O
PCB.
(4)
Remove the two screws, lock washers, flat washers securing the right side
of the PCB to the bracket.
(5)
Loosen three screws (two of which also secure the P--clamps) on the left
side of the PCB.
(6)
Remove the PCB.
(7)
Install the Power I/O PCB by reversing the removal procedures.
Figure: 4--4 Encoder and Power and I/O PCB Location
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 11
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.6
Encoder Assembly Removal
(1)
Release 12 captive screws and open the right--side pedestal cover.
(2)
Disconnect P12 of the encoder cable from J12 of the Controller PCB.
(3)
Cut the ty--wraps holding the ribbon cable to the main cable run.
(4)
Detach the Encoder assembly from the pedestal by removing two screws
and lock washers. (Be careful not to detach the bottom plastic cover on the
Encoder.)
(5)
Loosen the Allen Set screw on the Encoder gear collar and remove the
gear from the Encoder.
(6)
Remove four screws, lock washers, and flat washers securing the Encoder
carrier/mount to the Encoder. Remove Encoder.
(7)
Install the Encoder assembly by reversing the removal procedures. When
installing ensure the Encoder gear meshes properly to the pedestal gear by
slowly turning the motor fan while tightening the Encoder carrier/mount
screws.
NOTE
Ensure that the black plastic bottom cover is held in place by
putting a dab of RTV on the outer surface where the plastic tabs
meet the Encoder’s metal casing.
3749DOC020302
4 -- 12
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.7
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
AC Motor or Belt Removal
(1)
Release 24 captive screws and open the pedestal’s right and left side
covers.
(2)
Identify, tag, and remove the motor connections from TB2 on the Contactor
Bracket.
(3)
Identify, tag, and remove the connections from the motor capacitors located
in the pedestal assembly.
(4)
Drive Belt Removal :
Loosen four motor mounting plate bolts securing the motor to the
pedestal case.
Back off jam nut and loosen the tension bolt.
Slide mount to provide slack in the belt. When there’s enough slack
remove the belt from the pulleys.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
(5)
Remove the top two bolts, lock washers, and flat washers securing the motor to its mounting plate.
(6)
Screw in two lengths of threaded stock (12 inches long for X--Band and 14
inches long for an S--Band, matching the mounting bolt’s threads) into the
two top mounting bolt’s holes.
(7)
Remove the bottom two bolts, lock washers, and flat washers securing the
motor to its mounting plate.
(8)
Slide the motor through the pedestal’s right side.
(9)
Install motor and belt by reversing the removal procedures.
4 -- 13
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.8
X--Band RF Assembly Update
4.1.8.1
HV Binding Post Removal
(1)
Remove all power from the MTR Up and tag the display to indicate the system is not to be energized.
(2)
Using a 10mm socket and ratchet, loosen 12 captive cover screws on the
pedestal’s left and right side covers of the pedestal and swing covers open.
Locate and disconnect the green and yellow high voltage leads at E1 and
E2 of the HV Binding Post Bracket, Figure: 4--5.
(3)
(4)
Remove two screws, lock washers, and flat washers and the binding post
bracket from the pedestal casing.
Figure: 4--5 HV Binding Post Removal
3749DOC020302
4 -- 14
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.9
Magnetron or Front-- End Removal
(1)
Locate and disconnect the D--Connector attached to the IF Assembly.
(2)
Disconnect the connector attached to the TR--Limiter. On some units it
maybe necessary to cut the two STC leads at the TR Limiter, Figure: 4--6.
(3)
Remove plug attached to J5 of the Controller PCB and remove cable from
cable harness
TR LIMITER
CIRCULATOR
LNFE
LNFE
MAGNETRON
IF AMP
STC LEADS
IF CAN BRACKET
Figure: 4--6 X--Band RF Assembly Layout
CAUTION
THE MAGNETRON CONTAINS SENSITIVE AND MAGNETIC PARTS.
PLACE THE MAGNETRON ON A NON--STEEL SURFACE AND AWAY
FROM STEEL SURFACES AND OBJECTS.
(4)
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Using a screwdriver, remove the two screws attaching the IF can bracket to
the IF Can, (do not discard screws).
4 -- 15
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
(5)
Using a screwdriver, remove the two screws attaching the IF can bracket to
the MTR casing. The new bracket and screws are included in the Up--date
Kit.
NOTE
Screws are installed using Locktite. Use care when removing
screws so not to strip head of screw.
(6)
Remove four 50mm, socket head screws using M3 Allen wrench from the
LNFE (A4A2), TR limiter (A6) and circulator.
(7)
Remove LNFE/IF Amplifier assembly and TR Limiter from the pedestal.
(8)
Remove the four screws attaching the circulator to the rotary joint.
(9)
Remove circulator, magnetron bracket, magnetron and ground strap.
(10) After Magnetron change and use SETUP TEST menu Calibration visual
Adjustment to set the new Tune Preset. Also Magnetron send time hours
can be reset.
3749DOC020302
4 -- 16
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.9.1
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Removal of LNFE SUB ASSY
Special information using X--Band XCVR--UP, see installation information as
shown in Figure: 4--7.
Figure: 4--7 Removal of LNFE SUB ASSY
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 17
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.10
RF Installation
(1)
Remove IF Can bracket from the assembly.
(2)
Install the complete RF assembly to the rotary joint from the modulator
door side of the MTR. Attach RF assembly to the rotary joint using four
65mm allen screws.
NOTE
The magnetron will be facing the rear inside pedestal wall as
shown in Figure: 4--8.
(3)
Connect the D--Connector to the IF Amplifier Assembly.
(4)
Remove the two socket head screws at the door hinge on the Controller
side of the pedestal. Discard screws.
(5)
Cut cable ties and reroute cable harness to allow the new IF Can Bracket
to be fitted in place and bolted to the door hinge. Secure bracket and door
hinge in place using supplied longer hardware.
NOTE
INSURE THAT CABLE HARNESS IS DRESSED TO PREVENT
CHAFING ON BRACKETS OR OTHER SHARP EDGES WHEN
DOOR IS CLOSED.
3749DOC020302
(6)
Attach IF Can Bracket to the IF Amplifier Assembly.
(7)
Neatly lace cable harness using supplied cable ties.
4 -- 18
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
IF Can Bracket Assembly
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
RF Assembly Installation
Figure: 4--8 RF Installation
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 19
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.11
S-- Band MTR Up RF Assembly Removal
Removal and installation of the RF Assembly is restricted by its size. The S-Band MTR Up RF Assembly configuration can only be removed and installed
within the pedestal by the disassembly or assembly of the individual components
from the RF Assembly.
4.1.11.1
Magnetron (V1) Removal
CAUTION
THE MAGNETRON CONTAINS SENSITIVE AND MAGNETIC PARTS.
ONCE REMOVED, PLACE THE MAGNETRON ON A NON--STEEL
SURFACE AND AWAY FROM STEEL SURFACES AND OBJECTS.
3749DOC020302
(1)
Loosen 12 captive cover screws on the pedestal s left side of the pedestal
and swing open cover.
(2)
Disconnect the Magnetron leads (green and yellow) from the binding posts,
E1 and E2.
(3)
Remove two screws, lock washers, and flat washers and the binding post
bracket from the pedestal casing.
(4)
Facing the back of the magnetron and using NON--Ferrous/NON--Magnetic
hand tools remove four bolts, flat washers and lock washers where the
magnetron meets the circulator and two screws, flat washers and lock
washers where the magnetron’s mounting bracket meets the pedestal casing.
(5)
Remove magnetron from the RF assembly.
(6)
Install magnetron by reversing the removal procedures.
(7)
After Magnetron change and use SETUP TEST menu Calibration visual
Adjustment to set the new Tune Preset. Also Magnetron send time hours
can be reset.
4 -- 20
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Service and Installation Manual
PEDESTAL FRONT VIEW
PEDESTAL LEFT SIDE VIEW
TR LIMITER
MAGNETRON
IF AMP
P1
INPUT
LNFE
CIRCULATOR
P1
IF AMP
DO NOT ADJUST
DEPOT LEVEL TUNED
PEDESTAL BOTTOM VIEW
(LNFE/IF AMP ONLY)
Figure: 4--9 S--Band RF Assembly Layout
4.1.11.2
LNFE/ IF Amp (A4) Assembly and TR Limiter (A6) Removal
NOTE
Refer to Figure: 4--9 during the LNFE/IF Amp and TR Limiter
removal procedures.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
(1)
Loosen 12 captive cover screws on both sides of the pedestal and swing
open the covers.
(2)
Unplug the connector, P1, on the bottom of the LNFE/IF Amp. assembly.
(3)
Cut the tie--wraps holding the TR Limiter coax cable, W1, to the main cable
run.
(4)
Unplug P5 from the Controller PCB (A3).
(5)
Remove the two screws on the right side of the IF Amp. holding the LNFE/
IF Amp. mounting bracket to the pedestal case.
4 -- 21
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
NOTE
CAREFUL -- Hold the TR Limiter while completing Step #4.
(6)
Remove the four Allen screws, flat washers and lock washers securing
LNFE (A4A2) and the TR Limiter (A6) to the RF assembly.
(7)
Remove the TR Limiter from the pedestal.
(8)
Remove the LNFE/IF AMP assembly from the pedestal.
(9)
Install LNFE/IF AMP assembly and TR Limiter by reversing the removal
procedures.
NOTE
When replacing the TR Limiter reuse the coax cable assembly, W1.
Identify position/orientation for installing of TR Limiter as shown in
Figure: 4--9.
4.1.11.3
Circulator (A7) Removal
(1)
Remove the Magnetron as detailed in chapter 4.1.11.1 .
(2)
Remove the LNFE/IF Amp assembly and TR Limiter as detailed in chapter
4.1.11.2.
NOTE
Careful not remove rotary joint srews.
(3)
3749DOC020302
Using a 3/16“ Allen Wrench cut on the short side to clear 3/4“, remove the
three Allen screws and flat washers at positions #5, #6 and #7 holding the
Circulator up to the Rotary Joint.
4 -- 22
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
(4)
Remove the Circulator from the pedestal.
(5)
Install the Circulator by reversing the removal procedures.
Figure: 4--10 Circulator -- Rotary Joint Under View
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 23
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.12
X-- Band MTR Up Worm Gear Shaft Removal
(1)
Loosen 12 captive screws and open the left--side pedestal cover.
(2)
Remove the Power I/O PCB, chapter 4.1.5.
(3)
Remove the RF Assembly as detailed in chapter 4.1.8 for X--Band and
chapter 4.1.11 for S--Band.
(4)
Cover the inside pedestal case bottom and area adjacent to the pedestal
with oil absorbent sheet product to prevent oil spillage.
(5)
Drain the oil from the drive housing reservoir as detailed in chapter 5.2.2.
Tilt the pedestal from the back by 1“ to insure complete oil drainage from
the worm gear cavity as circumstances permit.
(6)
Loosen the four motor mounting bolts and then loosen the drive belt tension bolt enough to remove the drive belt from pulleys.
(7)
Remove the large pulley from the worm gear shaft by removing three bolts
from the pulley hub. Secure two of the same bolts into the hub holes provided for backing the hub out of the pulley.
(8)
Alternate the tightening the two bolts until the pulley can be easily removed
from the worm gear shaft.
(9)
Remove three screws from the worm gear shaft bearing clamps.
NOTE
.Do not remove the 1” Pipe Plug on the Pedestal’s right side. This
plug provides access to the press fitted needle bearings that is not
field serviceable.
3749DOC020302
4 -- 24
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
(10) Pull gently on the worm gear shaft bearing clamp (being careful not to cut
the shaft seal on the worm gear shaft keyway edges). Remove the bearing
clamp.
(11) Remove the worm gear shaft by pulling it straight out from pedestal. If necessary, slightly move the T--Bar in a counter--clockwise direction to help
loosen it.
CAUTION
CAREFULLY REPLACE THE WORM GEAR SHAFT AND
BEARING CLAMP TO AVOID CUTTING THE SHAFT SEAL ON
THE WORM GEAR SHAFT KEYWAY EDGES
NOTE
Coat all bearings with oil to aid in installation.
(12) Install worm gear shaft by reversing the removal procedures with the following difference.
When the worm gear in installed into the pedestal casing, feel for when
the worm gear engages the drive gear.
Gently move the T--bar clockwise to pull the worm gear into place.
Carefully inspect the gasket for wear and damage and replace as
needed.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 25
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.13
S-- Band MTR Up Worm Gear Shaft Removal
(1)
Loosen 12 captive screws and open the left--side pedestal cover.
(2)
Remove the Power I/O PCB, chapter 4.1.5.
(3)
Remove the RF Assembly starting in chapter 4.1.11.
(4)
Cover the inside pedestal case bottom and area adjacent to the pedestal
with oil absorbent sheet product to prevent oil spillage.
(5)
Drain the oil from the drive housing reservoir as detailed in chapter 5.2.3
Tilt the pedestal from the back by 1“ to insure complete oil drainage from
the worm gear cavity as circumstances permit.
(6)
Remove the Rotary Joint, chapter 4.1.22.3.
(7)
Loosen the four motor mounting bolts and then loosen the drive belt tension bolt enough to remove the drive belt from pulleys.
(8)
Remove the large pulley from the worm gear shaft by removing three bolts
from the pulley hub. Secure two of the same bolts into the hub holes provided for backing the hub out of the pulley.
(9)
Alternate the tightening the two bolts until the pulley can be easily removed
from the worm gear shaft.
(10) Remove three screws from the worm gear shaft bearing clamps.
NOTE
Do not remove the 1--in Pipe Plug on the Pedestal’s right side. This
plug provides access to the press fitted needle bearings that is not
field serviceable.
3749DOC020302
4 -- 26
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
(11) Pull gently on the worm gear shaft bearing clamp (being careful not to cut
the shaft seal on the worm gear shaft keyway edges). Remove the bearing
clamp.
(12) Remove the worm gear shaft by pulling it straight out from pedestal. (If necessary, slightly move the T--Bar in a counter--clockwise direction to help
loosen it).
CAUTION
CAREFULLY REPLACE THE WORM GEAR SHAFT AND
BEARING CLAMP TO AVOID CUTTING THE SHAFT SEAL ON
THE WORM GEAR SHAFT KEYWAY EDGES
NOTE
Coat all bearings with oil to aid in installation.
(13) Install worm gear shaft by reversing the removal procedures with the following differences:
When the worm gear in installed into the pedestal casing, feel for when
the worm gear engages the drive gear.
Gently move the T--bar clockwise to pull the worm gear into place.
Carefully inspect the gasket for wear and damage and replace as
needed.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 27
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.14
3749DOC020302
Motor Capacitors A10 C1 and A10 C2 Removal (Single Phase)
(1)
Release 24 captive screws and open both pedestal covers.
(2)
Discharge both capacitors to the pedestal case ground using the Contactor
Bracket A9TB2--6, --7,--8, --10 and --11.
(3)
Remove the four screws holding the Contactor Bracket and lower it to gain
easier access.
(4)
Carefully identify, tag and remove the motor wires from capacitors (SOME
VOLTAGE MAY REMAIN). Again discharge each capacitor terminal after it
is removed.
(5)
Remove the two screws holding the Capacitor Bracket (A10) and remove it
from inside the pedestal.
(6)
Cut the tie--wraps securing the capacitors to the capacitor mounting
bracket. Remove the capacitors.
(7)
Install the capacitors by reversing the removal procedures. When reattaching the capacitors apply RTV--108, where the tie--wraps firmly meet the
each capacitor.
4 -- 28
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.15
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Fan Wheel, Removal
(1)
Release 12 captive screws and open the right--side pedestal cover.
(2)
Insert a 1/8“ shaft screw driver into the hole opposite the set screw while
the hole is at the 10 o’clock position. Place the tip of the screwdriver into
the 1/8“ hole located in the motor s casing horizontally in line with the fan
face’s hole. Use this screwdriver in place to steady the fan when loosening
the set screw so as to keep from damaging the fan blades.
(3)
Loosen the Allen screw securing the fan wheel by inserting a 3 1/2“ shaft,
4MM ball Tip wrench or drive through the fan blades to the fan collar’s set
screw.
(4)
Remove the fan wheel.
(5)
Install the fan wheel by reversing the removal procedures.
4 -- 29
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.16
X/S--Band MTR Up Modulator PCB Removal
NOTE
For locating Modulator hardware see Figure: 4--11.
(1)
Disconnect the plugs attached to J1 and J2 of the Modulator PCB.
(2)
Remove screws, lock washers, and flat washers #1, #2, #3 and #4 connecting Q13 to the Modulator.
(3)
Remove screws, lock washers, and flat washers #5 through #22.
(4)
Remove screw, lock washer, and flat washer #23.
(5)
Carefully remove the Modulator PCB.
CAUTION
WHEN INSTALLING THE MODULATOR PCB, CAREFULLY
ALIGN THE PCB WITH THE PINS OF THE POWER MODULE
TO AVOID DAMAGE
3749DOC020302
4 -- 30
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Figure: 4--11 Modulator PCB Hardware Location
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 31
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.17
Modulator MOSFET (A2Q13) Installation
(1)
Locate the Modulator FET (A2Q13) mounted on the right--side pedestal
door.
NOTE
Q13 is mounted to the MTR door under the Modulator PCB.
Modulator PCB must be removed to gain access to Q13.
(2)
If Q13 is installed without a MOSFET Housing, perform steps 3, 4, and 5
below. If MOSFET Housing is installed, proceed to step 6.
(3)
Remove and discard Q13’s two mounting screws.
(4)
Remove the MOSFET and Heat Sink Sil Pad.
(5)
Install MOSFET Housing assembly G627215--1 using the new supplied
hardware.
Screw, M3 12MM
Washer, Lock, M3
Washer, flat, M3
MOSFET
Housing
Spacer, Aluminum
Figure: 4--12 MOSFET Installation
3749DOC020302
4 -- 32
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
NOTE
Make sure the mounting bracket has a uniform layer of heat sink
compound on its pedestal cover side. Replace the heatsink Sil
Pad between the MOSFET housing assembly and the heat sink.
Tighten down the mounting screws to 6--inch pounds.
(6)
Install new Modulator PCB by reversing the removal procedures outline in
chapter 4.1.16 (Figure: 4--13).
shielding hose
Figure: 4--13 Shielding hose installation
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 33
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.18
X/S-- Band Power Converter (A2A2) Module Removal
(1)
Remove the Modulator PCB as detailed in chapter 4.1.16.
(2)
Remove six screws, lock washers, and flat washers securing the Power
Converter Module to the right--side pedestal door.
(3)
Remove Power Converter Module and heatsink SIL pad.
(4)
Install Power Converter Module by reversing the removal procedures.
A2
Mount Power Converter, A2, so the
side with 4 pins is on the left.
Q13
Figure: 4--14 Power Converter (A2A2) Modul
3749DOC020302
4 -- 34
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.19
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
X/S--Band Controller (A3) PCB Removal
(1)
Loosen 12 captive screws and open right side pedestal cover.
(2)
Remove all connectors, typically P3, P4, P5, P7,JP9, P10, P12, P13 and
P8 (if PMU is installed) from the Controller PCB.
(3)
Remove Controller PCB from right side pedestal cover.
(4)
Install new Controller PCB by reversing the removal procedures.
(5)
Secure covers, and perform operation checkout of the Radar System.
Figure: 4--15 Controller PCB Removal
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 35
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.20
Antenna Array Removal
4.1.20.1
X-- Band Antenna Array Removal
(1)
Rotate the Antenna Array by manually turning the motor fan wheel by hand
to a position for safe removal.
(2)
Remove four nuts, flat washers and lock washers from the mounting studs
on the bottom of the Pedestal T--bar.
(3)
Lift the Antenna Array strait up and remove.
(4)
Cover the Pedestal RF fixture with plastic sheeting to prevent moisture and
dirt contamination.
(5)
Install the Antenna Array by reversing the removal procedures.
WARNING
When reinstalling an Antenna Array grease the O’ring gasket with
Silicon grease.
4.1.20.2
3749DOC020302
S-- Band Antenna Array Removal
(1)
Rotate the Antenna Array by manually turning the motor fan wheel by hand
to a position for safe removal.
(2)
Disconnect the coax connector on the end of the Array and ensure the
coax is not attached to the array by removing the necessary P--clamps and
cutting the necessary ty--wraps.
(3)
Remove 12 resp. 16 bolts, flat washers and lock washers from the bottom
of the Pedestal T--bar.
(4)
Lift the Antenna Array strait up and remove.
4 -- 36
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
(5)
Cover the open coax connectors with plastic sheeting to prevent moisture
and dirt contamination.
(6)
Install the Antenna Array see chapter 2.3.4.3 or 2.3.4.4.
WARNING
When reinstalling an Antenna Array coat the coax connector’s
threads with Silicon grease.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 37
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.21
T-- Bar and Drive Shaft Assembly Removal
4.1.21.1
X--Band MTR Up
(1)
Remove the Array as detailed in chapter 4.1.20.1.
(2)
Remove the Encoder Assembly as detailed in chapter 4.1.6.
(3)
Remove the RF Assembly as detailed in chapter 4.1.8.
(4)
Remove the Worm Gear Shaft as detailed in chapter 4.1.12.
(5)
Remove eight mounting bolts, lock washers and flat washers. Remove the
two hoisting plates.
(6)
Pull the T--Bar and Drive Shaft assembly up and out of pedestal.
NOTE
Lubricate all bearings and gaskets when replacing T--Bar and Drive
Shaft assembly.
(7)
Install T--Bar and Drive Shaft Assembly by reversing the removal procedures with the following exceptions:
When lowering the Drive Shaft Assembly into place use centering
guides. Screw two 8“ lengths of appropriate threaded stock (check the
mounting bolt’s thread size) into opposing positions of the Drive Shaft
Assembly’s mounting bolt holes.
As the Drive Shaft Assembly is lowered into place locate the three flat
surfaces on the bottom plate. Align with the three flat edges on the
pedestal casing and push assembly into place.
3749DOC020302
4 -- 38
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.21.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
S--Band MTR Up
(1)
Remove the Array as detailed in chapter 4.1.20.
(2)
Remove the Encoder Assembly as detailed in chapter 4.1.5.
(3)
Remove the RF Assembly starts with chapter 4.1.13.
(4)
Remove the Worm Gear Shaft as detailed in chapter 4.1.12.
(5)
Remove the to Rotary Joint Top Section, chapter 4.1.15.
(6)
Remove eight mounting bolts, lock washers and flat washers. Remove the
two hoisting plates.
(7)
Pull the T--Bar and Drive Shaft assembly up and out of pedestal.
NOTE
Lubricate all bearings and gaskets when replacing T--Bar and Drive
Shaft assembly.
(8)
Install T--Bar and Drive Shaft Assembly by reversing the removal procedures with the following exceptions:
When lowering the Drive Shaft Assembly into place use centering
guides. Screw two 8“ lengths of appropriate threaded stock (check the
mounting bolt’s thread size) into opposing positions of the Drive Shaft
Assembly’s mounting bolt holes.
As the Drive Shaft Assembly is lowered into place locate the three flat
surfaces on the bottom plate. Align with the three flat edges on the
pedestal casing and push assembly into place.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 39
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.22
Rotary Joint Removal
4.1.22.1
X--Band MTR Up
(1)
Remove the Antenna Array as detailed in chapter 4.1.20.1.
(2)
Remove the Power I/O PCB, chapter 4.1.5.
(3)
Remove the RF Assembly as detailed in chapter 4.1.8.
(4)
Place oil absorbent towels in bottom of the Pedestal.
(5)
Drain the oil from the drive housing reservoir as detailed in chapter 5.2.4.
(6)
Remove Worm Gear as detailed in chapter 4.1.12.
(7)
Remove the Drive Shaft Assembly as detailed in chapter 4.1.21.1.
(8)
Remove the four screws from the bottom of the rotary joint.
(9)
Check the rotary joint for free vertical travel in the housing.
(10) Place a piece of soft wood with a hole drilled for the RF probe on top of the
rotary joint and GENTLY tap the rotary joint down.
(11) Turn and move the rotary joint base until free vertical travel is felt.
(12) Turn the rotary joint so the cut away on bottom mounting collar is facing the
front of the pedestal.
(13) Pull the rotary joint down checking for significant horizontal movement as
the rotary joint bottom is within 1 inch of the bottom of the pedestal inside
casing.
(14) Move the rotary joint toward the rear of the pedestal as it is gently pulled
down.
3749DOC020302
4 -- 40
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
NOTE
When replacing the rotary joint, inspect and lubricate all bearings,
gaskets, and add shims as necessary. Refer to chapter 4.1.22.2.
for instructions on rotary joint shimming. Add approximately 1650
ML. of Mobil Synthetic Oil to oil reservoir when replacing oil. Check
for proper oil level at site gage window.
(15) Remove rotary joint completely from drive housing and the pedestal.
(16) Install rotary joint by reversing the removal procedures to include the following.
4.1.22.2
X-- Band MTR Up Rotary Joint Shimming (For Field Service)
NOTE
No shimming is required for an S--Band MTR Up.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
(1)
Apply a thin coat of grease to all O--rings found on the rotary joint.
(2)
Place two 0.030 inch shims (opaque orange color) on the rotary joint
mounting base and slide the rotary joint into the antenna drive housing.
(3)
Install eight bolts, flat washers, and lock washers into the antenna drive
housing and tighten.
(4)
Install four screws to mount the rotary joint to the main pedestal casting.
(5)
Place a straight edge across the top surface of the T--bar passing approximately 1/8--inch from the center probe of the rotary joint.
(6)
Place a 0.005 inch shim (color blue) and a 0.002 inch shim (color red) together and slide between the straight edge and the annular ring around the
center probe of the rotary joint. The fit should be neither tight nor loose.
4 -- 41
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
(7)
4.1.22.3
Add or subtract shims from the base of the rotary joint by removing the four
screws and pulling rotary joint down enough to add shims or remove shims
from base. Re--tighten screws and perform step 6 again. Repeat steps 6
and 7 until desired results are achieved.
S--Band MTR Up
(1)
Remove the Antenna Array as detailed in chapter 4.1.20.
(2)
Remove the coax assembly from the T--bar and Rotary Joint Top Connector.
(3)
Remove the Power I/O PCB, chapter 4.1.5.
(4)
Remove the RF Assembly start with chapter 4.1.11.
(5)
Place oil absorbent towels in bottom of the Pedestal.
(6)
Drain the oil from the drive housing reservoir as detailed in chapter 5.2.4.
NOTE
The S--Band Rotary Joint is in two sections, top and bottom.
Removal of the bottom section is very difficult and should only be
performed when the Rotary Joint is being completely replaced.
(7)
Remove four screws, flat washers and lock washers from the top rotary
joint section.
(8)
Install a dummy 7/16--in DIN Connector on the Rotary Joint Top Connector
to protect the threads.
(9)
Carefully pull up on the Rotary Joint Top Section and remove from pedestal.
(10) Remove the four screws from the bottom section of the rotary joint.
3749DOC020302
4 -- 42
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
(11) Check the rotary joint for free vertical travel in the housing.
(12) Place a piece wooden round stock, 1--1/8 inch diameter, with a hole drilled
in the center on one end for the RF probe on top of the rotary joint and
GENTLY tap the rotary joint down.
(13) Turn and move the rotary joint base until free vertical travel is felt.
(14) Pull the Rotary Joint Bottom Section down and remove from the pedestal.
NOTE
When replacing the rotary joint, inspect and lubricate all bearings,
gaskets, and add shims as necessary. Refer to chapter 6.9.21 for
instructions on rotary joint shimming. Add approximately 1650 ML.
of Mobil Synthetic Oil to oil reservoir when replacing oil.
Check for proper oil level at site gage window.
(15) Install rotary joint by reversing the removal procedures.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 43
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
T-BAR AND DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
ROTARY JOINT TOP SECTION
MOUNTING BOLTS
WARNING
OIL FILL PLUG
WARNING
ROTARY JOINT TOP CONNECTOR
Figure: 4--16 S--Band MTR Up Rotary Joint and T--Bar Assembly Top View
3749DOC020302
4 -- 44
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.1.23
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Performance Monitor Unit (PMU) Removal
WARING
DO NOT REMOVE PMU UNTIL ADEQUATE MEANS OF
WEATHER PROOFING THE PEDESTAL CASING IS AVAILABLE.
SEE STEP #5.
(1)
Release 12 captive screws and open the left--side pedestal cover.
(2)
Remove the PMU connector, P8, from the Pedestal Controller PCB.
(3)
Remove four screws, lock washers, and flat washers securing the PMU to
the pedestal chassis.
(4)
Carefully fish the Cable and plug through the Pedestal casing and remove
the PMU.
NOTE
Return the entire failed PMU in its casing to Raytheon Marine for
servicing. There are no field serviceable adjustments or parts.
(5)
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Until the PMU is reinstalled, cover the access hole in the Pedestal casing
for weather protection with the PMU Pedestal Access Plate. This plate was
removed when the PMU was installed.
4 -- 45
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.2
10kW PEDESTAL - X-- BAND (6 ft.)
4.2.1
Pedestal overview
The pedestal is connected to the NSC Display see Figure: 4--46, connection plan
Figure: 4--63 and block diagram Figure: 4--47.
13
12
11
10
3749DOC020302
Figure: 4--46 Pedestal -- sub assemblies -MDL--301 modulator PCB
Magnetron
IFB--200 IF -- Amplifier
Microwave assembly
ACP30020 motor control PCB
10 Circulator
GM--046 motor group
11 Limiter
HTL 12000
12 Filter
Motor
13 Front end
Gear Box
4 -- 46
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
ANTENNA
ENCODER
MOTOR
ROTARY
JOINT
TRANSITION
CIRCULATOR
MAGNETRON
LIMITER
MODULATOR
MDL-- 301
FRONT-END
IF
IFB--200
ACP --30020
CABEL
Figure: 4--47 Pedestal blockdiagram
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 47
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2
Pedestal Replacement Procedure
Special tools:
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
To have access to the pedestal, proceed in the following mode:
-- loosen 4 M8 screws with a socket wrench 13 mm;
-- open the pedestal.
4.2.2.1
ACP-- 30020 motor control board replacement
Special tools:
-- Philips screw driver 3 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
ACP--30020 board replacement procedure:
-- Refer to the pedestal access procedure;
-- disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- take off the 4 nuts M8, remove washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- disconnect J1, J5 and J6 connectors of the ACP 30020.
-- loosen the 6 M3 x 12 TC screws and replace the ACP 30020.
To reassemble the new ACP--30020 board, reverse the above procedure.
Figure: 4--48 ACP--30020 motor control board
3749DOC020302
4 -- 48
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
MDL--301 modulator board replacement
Special tools:
-- Philips screw driver 3 mm.
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
MDL 301 board replacement procedure
-- Refer to the pedestal access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off 4 M8 nuts, remove washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- Disconnect J1 and J2 connectors;
-- Remove the modulator cover, unscrewing 10 M3 x10 TC screws;
-- Disconnect J3 connector;
-- Take off the yellow-- green ground wire; unscrewing 1 M3 x 12 TC screw
connecting the wire lug to the magnetron;
-- Unsolder the yellow/ green magnetron wires;
-- Loosen the 4 M3 X 12 TC screws and replace the MDL 301.
Figure: 4--49 MDL--301 modulator board
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 49
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
-- Reassemble and connected the MDL--301 on the plate and perform the
following adjustment:
D Execute the Warm up;
D On the ACP--30020 board, set dip--switch 4 of S1 to ON.
D Set Radar to extra long pulse and use VR1 on modulator MDL-- 301
to adjust the magnetron current until DL8 on the ACP--30020 board is lit.
D Switch off the equipment, on the ACP--30020 board set dip--switch 4 of
S1 to OFF.
3749DOC020302
4 -- 50
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.3
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Magnetron replacement
CAUTION
The magnetron contains sensitive and magnetic parts.
Once removed, place the magnetron on a non--steel
surface and away from magnetizable objects
Special tools (NON--Ferrous/NON--Magnetic tools):
-- Phillips screw driver 3 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
Magnetron replacement procedure:
-- Refer to the pedestal access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off the 4 nuts M10, the washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- Remove the MDL 301 cover, unscrewing the 10 M3 x 10 TC screws;
-- Unsolder 2 wires (yellow and green) of the pulses transformer;
-- Unscrew the 4 M4 x 12 screws holding the magnetron.
To reassemble the new magnetron, reverse the procedure.
For the adjustment procedure refer to the MDL--301 modulator board procedure.
Figure: 4--50 Magnetron
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 51
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.4
Front--end replacement
Special tools:
-- Phillips screw driver 3 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
LNFE replacement procedure:
-- Refer to the pedestal unit access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off the 4 nuts M10, the washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- Remove the IFB--200 cover unscrewing the 6 M3 X 10 TC screws
-- Disconnect J1 connector;
-- Unscrew the 4 M4 x 8 TC screws fixing the front--end to the IF holder.
-- Unscrew the 4 M4 x 50 TC screws fixing the front--end to the limiter and
circulator.
To reassemble the new front--end, reverse the procedure.
Figure: 4--51 Front end
3749DOC020302
4 -- 52
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.5
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Antenna Motor Group replacement
Special tools:
-- Philips screw driver 3 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
Antenna motor replacement procedure:
-- Refer to the pedestal access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off the 4 nuts M8, the washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- Unscrew the 4 M5x16 TE screws fixing the motor group to the scanner unit;
To reassemble the new motor group, reverse the procedure.
Figure: 4--52 Antenna motor group
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 53
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.6
RTM Plate replacement
Special tools:
-- Philips screw driver 3 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
To replace RTM plate, proceed in the following mode:
-- Refer to the scanner unit access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off the 4 nuts M8, the washers and take out the RTX plate.
To reassemble the new RTM plate, reverse the procedure.
Figure: 4--53 RTM plate
3749DOC020302
4 -- 54
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.7
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Circulator replacement
Special tools:
-- Philips screw driver 4 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
Circulator replacement procedure:
-- Refer to the pedestal access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off the 4 nuts M8, the washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- Unscrew the 4 M4x12 TC screws fixing the magnetron spacer to the
circulator;
-- Unscrew the 4 M4x50 TC screws fixing the front end and limiter to the
circulator;
-- Unscrew the 4 M4x60 TC screws fixing the circulator to the RTM plate.
To reassemble the new circulator, reverse the procedure observing the direction
of the circulator.
Figure: 4--54 Circulator
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 55
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.8
Limiter replacement
Special tools:
-- Philips screw driver 4 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
Limiter replacement procedure:
-- Refer to the pedestal access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off the 4 nuts M8, the washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- Unscrew the 4 M4x50 TC screws fixing the front end to the limiter;
-- Remove the limiter between the circulator and the front end with filter.
To reassemble the new limiter, reverse the procedure observing the direction of
the limiter and of the filter.
Figure: 4--55 Limiter
3749DOC020302
4 -- 56
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.9
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Filter replacement
Special tools:
-- Philips screw driver 4 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
Filter replacement procedure:
-- Refer to the pedestal access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off the 4 nuts M8, the washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- Unscrew the 4 M4x50 TC screws fixing the front end to the limiter;
-- Remove the front end with filter.
To reassemble the new filter, reverse the procedure observing the direction of
the filter.
Figure: 4--56 Filter
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 57
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.10
IFB--200 receiver board
Special tools:
-- Philips screw driver 3 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
IFB--200 receiver board replacement procedure:
-- Refer to the pedestal access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off the 4 nuts M8, the washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- Unscrew the 6 M3x12 TC screws and remove the cover of the receiver
module;
-- Disconnect all connectors;
-- Unscrew the 6 M3x12 TC and take off the receiver module.
To reassemble the new receiver module, reverse the procedure.
Figure: 4--57 IFB--200 receiver board
3749DOC020302
4 -- 58
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.11
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
HLT-- 11000 HL board replacement
Special tools:
-- Philips screw driver 4 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
HLT--11000 HL board replacement procedure:
-- Refer to the pedestal access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off the 4 nuts M8, the washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- In the upper side of the pedestal unscrew the 2 M4x10 TC screws fixing the
HLT--11000 board to the pedestal.
To reassemble the new module, reverse the procedure.
Figure: 4--58 HLT--11000 HL board
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 59
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.12
Antenna Rotation Motor replacement
Special tools:
-- Philips screw driver 3 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm.
Antenna motor group replacement:
-- Refer to the pedestal access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off the 4 nuts M8, the washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- Unscrew the 4 M5x16 TE screws fixing the motor group to the scanner unit;
-- Cut the cable ties of the J2 cable, J2 is located on the board ACP--30020;
-- Separate the power supply wires of the motor group from the wires connected
to the HLT--12000 board;
-- Unplug the RED and BLACK wires from the J2 connector;
-- Unscrew the 2 M4x10 TC screws fixing the board to the motor group;
-- Unscrew the 4 M4x12 TE screws (point 1 fig. 5--12) fixing the mounting plate
to the motor;
-- Unscrew the 1 M4x12 TE screw (point 2 fig. 5--12) fixing the gear to the
motor;
To reassemble the new motor,reverse the procedure.
Figure: 4--59 Antenna rotation motor
3749DOC020302
4 -- 60
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.13
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
HLT-- 12000 encoder board replacement
Special tools:
-- Philips screw driver 3 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm;
-- Cutters.
HLT--12000 encoder board replacement:
-- Refer to the pedestal access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off the 4 nuts M8, the washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- Cut the cable ties of the J2 cable, J2 is located on the board ACP--30020;
-- Separate the power supply wires of the motor group from the wires connect to
the board HLT--12000;
-- Unplug the wires RED and BLACK from the J2 connector;
-- Unscrew the 2 M4x10 TC screws fixing the board to the motor group;
To reassemble the new encoder module,reverse the procedure.
Figure: 4--60 HLT--12000 encoder board
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 61
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.2.14
Brushes replacement
Special tools:
-- Philips screw driver 3 mm;
-- Socket wrench 13 mm;
-- Screw driver flat tip 4 mm.
Motor brushes replacement:
-- Refer to the pedestal access procedure;
-- Disconnect J2, J3, J8 and J9 connectors of the ACP 30020;
-- Take off the 4 nuts M8, the washers and take out the RTX plate;
-- Unscrew the 4 M5x16 TE screws fixing the motor group to the scanner unit;
-- Unscrew the 2 plastic screws of the motor group;
-- Extract the 2 connectors with the brushes;
-- Remove the brushes from the fasten connectors.
To reassemble the new brushes,reverse the procedure.
Figure: 4--61 Brushes
3749DOC020302
4 -- 62
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.3
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
6 Foot X-- Band Array replacement
Special tools:
-- Hexagonal wrench 13 mm.
Array replacement procedure:
-- Unscrew the 4 M8x35 TE screws fixing the array to the scanner unit.
-- Apply a thin layer of silicon grease to all surfaces;
To reassemble the new array,reverse the procedure.
Figure: 4--62 6 foot X--band array
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 63
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.2.4
Interconnecting Diagram
The interconnecting diagram of the pedestal to refer Figure: 4--63.
Figure: 4--63 Pedestal block diagram
3749DOC020302
4 -- 64
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
4.3
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
XCVR TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (X--BAND, S--BAND)
DS1 on
Power I/O
lit?
NO
Troubleshoot cabling Display/VP2 to
XCVR, Interswitch System, 15VDC
system enable of selected port
NO
Input to A2
module on Modulator
140--170VDC
present?
YES
LEDs
DS1, 2, 8
(low voltages)
on Modulator
lit?
YES
DS5
Magnetron
Heater lit?
NO
-- check fuse F1 on
Modulator
-- replace Power I/O
-- replace A2 Module
YES
NO
Control/
enable input on A2
between 5 to
6VDC?
YES
NO
-- replace Power I/O
-- replace A2 Module
YES
A2 output
15VDC
present?
NO
-- replace A2 Module
YES
NO
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 65
-- replace Modulator
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
YES
DS9 High
Voltage ON lit
in XMIT?
NO
5VDC
High Voltage
enable TP11
on Controller
present?
YES -- replace Modulator
and/or MOSFET
Assy
NO
YES
Antenna
rotating?
NO
-- F1 on Controller
-- Antenna safety
circuitry cabling
-- Interlock
(down version)
YES
-- replace Modulator
High Voltage
at CR21
720--740/800
VDC?
-- replace Modulator
and/or MOSFET
Assy
NO
YES
TP12
Modulator
12Vpp pulses
present?
NO
TP11 on
Modulator TTL
pulses
present?
NO
YES
3749DOC020302
YES -- replace MOSFET
Assy and/or
Modulator (defect.
Drivers)
4 -- 66
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
YES
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
NO
TP18 on
Modulator TTL
pulses
present?
NO
YES
-- replace Modulator
-- replace Controller.
Check cable to
Modulator.
-- replace Magnetron
and/or Modulator
(pulse transformer)
Picture not stable,turning erratically, wedges missing (Gyro Input stable)
Antenna rotating
at constant speed?
NO
-- check Motor Relay,
Fuses, Cabling, Motor
NO
-- check Fuse F5,
change Encoder
YES
Check TTL
Pulses at Controller
TP20,21 (90_ out
of phase)
and
TP25
YES
-- replace Controller
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 67
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
Tune Problems no Display Video
Replace Magnetron if xmit hours > 4000 h.
Perform Magnetron current adjustment.
Perform Coarse Tune and Tune Preset adjustment.
Tune
problems in
all Pulse lengths or
SP only?
SP
only
TP6, 7 on
Controller High
(5VDC) in
SP?
ALL
Tune
voltage
Controller TP8 approx.
12 VDC? Adjustable
with coarse
tune
YES
NO
YES
Tune Video at
TP3 on Controller
>5Vpp?
NO
-- adjust R154 on
Modulator to
lenght SP
-- replace Controller
NO
-- adjust R12 on IF
Ampl.
-- replace LNFE Sub
Assy
-- replace Limiter
-- replace Cable from
IF--Ampl. to Controller
YES
Display Video
at TP4 of
Controller at
>1.75Vpp?
NO
-- replace LNFE Sub
Assy
YES
NO
3749DOC020302
-- replace Controller
(verify Downlink at
TP13)
4 -- 68
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Service and Installation Manual
4.3.1
LED’s and Test Points
LEDs and Test Points assist maintenance personnel in isolating malfunctions to
a faulty PCB. LEDs and/or Test Points are used on the MTR and Display Power
and I/O PCB, on the MTR Controller PCB and the MTR Modulator PCB.
A layout drawing or a portion of the drawing of the PCB with LEDs and Test
Points high lighted are provided along with a table discussing the function of the
LED or describing the signal seen at the test point.
4.3.1.1
MTR Power and I/O PCB LED
LED
Description
DS1
+15V SYSTEM ENABLE FROM THE RADAR PROCESSOR VP2
PCB IS PRESENT.
C5
FL40
FL39
FL33 FL34 FL35
FL38
FL32
FL37
FL30 FL31
FL36
FL29
FL25
FL28
FL23 FL24
FL27
FL22
FL26
DS1
DS1
150/300 VDC ENABLE
TB2
LINE 2
GROUND
LINE 1
S HIELD
SPARE_C_N
SPARE_C_N
SPARE_B_N
SPARE_B_P
SHIELD
ANTSAFC2
ANTSAFC1
ANTCOM2
PHB_Z
SH IELD
PHZ_P
PHB_P
SH IELD
PHB_N
PHA_N
PHA_P
ENC_5V
SH IELD
ENC_GND
ENC_5V
ENC_GND
S HIELD
SPARE_A
SYSENAB_GND
V&D RTN
SYSENAB
V&D
UPLINK_P
UP_GND
UPLINK _N
1 TB3
TB3
ASTP20/ANTCOM
TB1
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ON THIS ASSY WITH TB1 PLUGGED IN
Figure: 4--17 MTR Power and I/O LED Location
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
4 -- 69
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.3.1.2
MTR Controller PCB LED and Test Points
S MTR Controller PCB LEDs
LED
Description
DS1
MAGI OK -- MAGNETRON CURRENT IS WITHIN SPECIFICATIONS.
DS2
SELF TEST IN PROCESS (RED FOR 2--3 SECONDS WHEN
FIRST TURNED ON)
DS3
HIGH VOLTAGE IS ENABLED ON MODULATOR
DS4
VIDEO AND/OR TRIGGERS ARE PRESENT ON DOWNLINK (DIM
IN STBY/TXON).
DS5
DATA IS PRESENT ON DOWNLINK (VERY DIM IN STBY/TXON).
DS6
DATA BEING RECEIVED ON DISPLAY COMM PORT (UPLINK)
DS7
DATA BEING SENT OUT TO DISPLAY COMM PORT (FUTURE
USE)
DS8
LOW VOLTAGES ARE IN SPECIFICATIONS AND O.K. (+5V, +15V,
--15V, +24V)
DS9
-- 15V (GENERATED FROM --17V ON CONTROLLER)
DS10
TRIGGERS FROM PMU ARE OCCURRING (ON IN STBY/TXON).
DS11
+5V (GENERATED FROM +15V ON CONTROLLER) (ON IN
STBY/TXON)
S MTR Controller PCB Test Points
Test
Point
3749DOC020302
Description
TP1
EXTERNAL TRIGGER
TP2
EXTERNAL TUNE
TP3
TUNE SOURCE -- VOLTAGE PULSE FROM IF AMPLIFIER TO INDICATE REL TUNE LEVEL.
TP4
VIDEO FROM RECEIVER
TP5
GND
TP6
LP LINE TO RECEIVER
TP7
MP LINE TO RECEIVER
TP8
TUNE VOLTAGE -- VOLTAGE SENT TO LOCAL OSCILLATOR
TP9
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE MODE FOR CONNECTION TO DISPLAY, 0
= PORT IS RECEIVING.
TP10
RECEIVE LINE FROM DISPLAY PORT.
4 -- 70
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Test
Point
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Description
TP11
MODULATOR INTERLOCK SIGNAL FROM DOOR SWITCH
TP12
TRANSMIT LINE TO DISPLAY PORT.
TP13
VIDEO AND DATA (DOWNLINK) TO THE DISPLAY (PRIOR TO
BACK TERMINATOR).
TP14
+24V FROM MODULATOR.
TP15
--15V CREATED ON CONTROLLER FROM --17V SENT BY THE
MODULATOR.
TP16
+15V FROM MODULATOR.
TP17
UP / DOWN SIGNAL TO PMU PORT.
TP18
INCREMENT SIGNAL TO PMU PORT
TP19
INCREMENT SIGNAL TO PMU PORT
TP20
PHASE A FROM ENCODER PORT.
TP21
PHASE B FROM ENCODER PORT.
TP22
--17V FROM MODULATOR.
TP23
RECEIVER CAL SIGNAL TO PMU PORT.
TP24
TRANSMITTER CAL SIGNAL TO PMU PORT.
TP25
PHASE Z (0 -- INDEX) FROM ENCODER PORT.
TP26
MODULATOR TRIGGER SIGNAL.
TP27
SHORT PULSE COMMAND SIGNAL SENT TO MODULATOR.
TP28
MAGI SIGNAL FROM MODULATOR.
TP29
CALIBRATION STORE SIGNAL TO PMU PORT
TP30
PMU ON/OFF SIGNAL SENT TO PMU PORT.
TP31
+5V CREATED ON CONTROLLER FROM +15V SENT BY THE
MODULATOR.
4 -- 71
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
4.3.1.3
MTR Modulator PCB LEDs and Test Points
S MTR Modulator PCB LEDs
LED
Description
DS1
+24VDC IS PRESENT
DS2
--17VDC IS PRESENT
DS3
+15VDC IS PRESENT
DS4
TAILBITER ACTIVE (NOT USED)
DS5
FILAMENT SUPPLY OK
DS6
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT
DS7
MAGNETRON HEATER IS SCHEDULED BACK (DECREASED)
DS8
MODULATOR +5VDC IS PRESENT
DS9
HIGH VOLTAGE IS ON AND IN SPECIFICATION
S MTR Modulator Test Points
Test
Point
3749DOC020302
Description
TP1
MAGNETRON CURRENT 0.4/A
TP2
PWM OUTPUT FOR HIGH VOLTAGE.
TP3
VOLTAGE REFERENCE.
TP4
VOLTAGE REFERENCE FOR PWM OF HIGH VOLTAGE POWER
SUPPLY.
TP5
INPUT TRIGGER (RECEIVED FROM CONTROLLER) ON NON
ADJUSTABLE SHORT PULSE MODULATOR.
MODIFIED TRIGGER FROM CONTROLLER THROUGH ADJUSTABLE SHORT PULSE CIRCUIT ON NEW ADJUSTABLE SHORT
PULSE MODULATOR.
TP6
HEATER DRIVE VOLTAGE.
TP7
MAG I OUTPUT VOLTAGE.
TP8
1ST STAGE PULSE WIDTH DETECTOR OUTPUT.
TP9
MAIN FET DRIVE LEVEL. USED TO SET MAG I.
TP10
HEATER SCHEDULING ON (’1’)/OFF (’0’) SIGNAL.
TP11
MAIN FET DRIVE PULSE.
TP12
MAIN FET SOURCE VOLTAGE.
TP13
VCC (+5V) ON ADJUSTABLE SHORT PULSE MODULATOR.
4 -- 72
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Test
Point
Description
TP14
VOLTAGE REFERENCE ON ADJUSTABLE SHORT PULSE MODULATOR.
TP15
GROUND ON ADJUSTABLE SHORT PULSE MODULATOR.
TP16
MODIFIED TRIGGER FROM CONTROLLER THROUGH ADJUSTABLE SHORT PULSE CIRCUIT PRIOR TO HOLD OFF ON NEW
ADJUSTABLE SHORT PULSE MODULATOR.
TP17
OUPUT OF ONE--SHOT FOR MOD)FIED CONTROLLER TRIGGER ON NEW ADJUSTABLE SHORT PULSE MODULATOR.
TP18
INPUT TRIGGER (RECEIVED FROM CONTROLLER) ON ADJUSTABLE SHORT PULSEMODULATOR.
TP22
DC RETURN FOR H.V. ON ADJUSTABLE SHORT PULSE MODULATOR.
TP23
--17V ON ADJUSTABLE SHORT PULSE MODULATOR.
TP24
+24V ON ADJUSTABLE SHORT PULSE MODULATOR.
R62
BOTTOM OF R62 FOR MAGNATRON CURRENT VERIFICATION/
ADJUSTMENT
4 -- 73
3749DOC020302
NSC Rader
Service and Installation Manual
3749DOC020302
4 -- 74
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
MAINTENANCE
5.1
GENERAL
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Periodic preventive maintenance will contribute significantly to the service life of
the radar systems. Under normal operating conditions, cleaning and inspection
are required and are considered separately below.
WARNING
BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE WORK ON A RADAR
SYSTEM, REMOVE INPUT POWER.
CAUTION
THE RADAR SYSTEMS CONTAINS CMOS DEVICES. REMOVE
POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING PLUGS OR REMOVING
PCBS. USE WRIST STRAPS AND GRASP ONLY BOARD EDGES
WHEN HANDLING PCBS. WHEN TRANSPORTING OR STORING
PCBS, USE STATIC PROTECTIVE CONTAINERS.
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN EACH UNIT OF RADAR SYSTEMS. DO NOT WORK ON THESE UNITS UNLESS ANOTHER INDIVIDUAL IS NEARBY WHO IS FAMILIAR WITH THE ELECTRICAL
HAZARDS OF THE EQUIPMENT AND WHO IS COMPETENT IN
ADMINISTERING FIRST AID.
TURN PRIME POWER OFF TO ALL UNITS BEFORE BEGINNING
ANY MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES. LABEL CIRCUIT BREAKERS
AND/OR SWITCHES TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZING OF
CIRCUITS.
GROUND CAPACITORS WHICH ARE LIKELY TO HOLD DANGEROUS POTENTIALS. BE AWARE OF THE LOCATIONS OF HIGH
VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS AND/OR HIGH VOLTAGE INPUT CONNECTIONS.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY, CALL FOR HELP FIRST, THEN ATTEND TO THE CASUALTY.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
5 -- 1
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
When operating, the radar system contains voltages hazardous to life. Hazardous AC input voltage is present even when the equipment is de--energized, unless the circuit breaker associated with the unit has been turned off. Maintenance personnel are cautioned to exercise extreme care and use common
sense when servicing the equipment. The following safety precautions must always be observed:
3749DOC020302
(1)
Whenever possible, de--energize equipment and turn off associated circuit
breakers before servicing.
(2)
When it is necessary to make adjustments inside equipment that is operating, do so using one hand, keeping the other hand clear of equipment
chassis.
(3)
De--energize equipment before removing plug--in printed circuit boards and
assemblies.
(4)
Become familiar with artificial respiration techniques.
(5)
Ad here to the safety notices that appear at the front of the manual.
5 -- 2
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE - X-- BAND AND S-- BAND
The MTR Up and Antenna Array is primarily a mechanical assembly and, as
such, requires regular preventive maintenance to assure long service life. The
following preventive maintenance schedule is recommended.
WARNING
WHEN PERFORMING MAINTENANCE ON THE DOWN SYSTEM, THE
RADAR SYSTEM WILL BE DOWN.
WARNING
REMOVE POWER FROM THE DOWN PEDESTAL AND SET THE ANTENNA SAFETY SWITCH TO OFF PRIOR TO PERFORMING MAINTENANCE ON THE ANTENNA ARRAY OR DOWN PEDESTAL.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
5 -- 3
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.2.1
Cleaning and Inspection
CAUTION
THE ANTENNA UNIT IS COVERED BY A FIBERGLASS WINDOW
WHICH MUST NOT BE PAINTED. METAL--BASED PAINT WILL CONSIDERABLY DISTORT THE RADIATION PATTERN, AND WILL ABSORB PART OF THE RADIATED ENERGY. EXTERNAL SURFACES OF
THE EQUIPMENT HAVE BEEN EPOXY--PAINT SPRAYED, AND
SHOULD REQUIRE ONLY CLEANING IN NORMAL USE.
CAUTION
DON’T PRESS GREASE IN THE GREASE NIPPLE UNDER X/S BAND
ARRAY. THE GEAR BOX WAS GREASED IN THE FACTORY WITH DEFINED MOUNT.
5.2.1.1
5.2.1.2
3749DOC020302
Cleaning (Yearly)
(1)
Remove power from MTR Up and place Antenna Safety Switch to OFF.
(2)
The antenna array and MTR Up exterior should be washed with fresh water. Clean or repair as necessary.
(3)
Remove MTR Up covers and clean internal components and connections
as necessary.
Inspection (Yearly)
(1)
Remove power from MTR Up and place Antenna Safety Switch to OFF.
(2)
Inspect mechanical mounting hardware for mechanical integrity of the
installation. Tighten mounting hardware as required (torque 15Nm).
(3)
Check for corrosion--free contact of the copper bonding strap. Repair or replace as necessary.
(4)
Inspect internal cable connections for loose or corroded terminal screws
and lugs. Repair or replace as necessary.
5 -- 4
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.2.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
X--Band Pedestal Lubrication (Yearly)
(1)
Remove power from MTR Up and place Antenna Safety Switch to OFF.
(2)
Check the gear box assembly lubricant level and use lubricants as using
the oil level sight gage, Figure: 5--1. The oil level should be seen 1/2 way
Down the oil sight gage. Gear box assembly lubricant capacity is 1.8
quarts, (1700 ML.). Use Mobile Synthetic oil.
USE CAUTION, DO NOT OVER FILL.
OIL LEVEL SIGHT GAGE
OIL DRAIN PLUG
ON
OFF
PEDESTAL GROUND STRAP
ANTENNA SAFETY SWITCH
Figure: 5--1 X--Band MTR Up Oil Check.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
5 -- 5
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.2.3
S--Band Pedestal Lubrication (Yearly)
(1)
Remove power from MTR Up and place Antenna Safety Switch to OFF.
(2)
Check the gear box assembly lubricant level using the oil level sight gage,
Figure: 5--2. The oil level should be seen 1/2 way up the oil sight gage.
Gear box assembly lubricant capacity is 2.11 quarts, (2000 ML). Use Mobile synthetic oil.
USE CAUTION, DO NOT OVER FILL.
Figure: 5--2 S--Band Oil Check
3749DOC020302
5 -- 6
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.2.4
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
X/S-- Band Pedestal Lubricant Draining (30 Months)
(1)
Lay down oil absorbent towels around the base of pedestal to catch oil
spillage and prevent unwanted release of oil.
NOTE
Release of oil into waterways may be a violation of local environmental laws.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
(2)
Place a container capable of holding 3 Liters of oil and a funnel with hose
under the drain spout.
(3)
Remove fill plug from upper right of pedestal as shown in Figure: 5--3.
(4)
Remove drain plug from the middle of the pedestal front as shown in
Figure: 5--3. Approximately 1.8 quarts, (1700 ML) of Oil will drain out for
an X--Band and approximately 2.11 quarts, (2000 ML) of oil will drain out for
an S--Band.
(5)
After all the oil is drained return the drain plugs to the fill hole and the drain
hole.
(6)
Refill the oil as detailed in chapter 5.2.2 for X--Band and chapter 5.2.3 for
an S--Band.
5 -- 7
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Oil Fill Plug
Oil Level
Site Gauge
Needle Bearing Plug
DO NOT REMOVE
Oil
Drain
Plug
OFF
Figure: 5--3 X--Band Pedestal Oil Plugs
3749DOC020302
5 -- 8
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.2.5
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Drive System Inspection (Yearly)
(1)
Remove power from MTR Up and place Antenna Safety Switch to OFF.
(2)
Open the access covers on the MTR Up.
WARNING
BE AWARE OF THE ANTENNA POSITION AT ALL TIMES WHILE PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING STEPS.
(3)
5.2.6
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Manually rotating the antenna, check for smoothness of rotation (no binding or roughness); inspect gear box for signs of oil leaks and drive motor
for evidence of excessive heating.
Access Cover Gasket Inspection (Yearly)
(1)
Remove power from MTR Up and place Antenna Safety Switch to OFF.
(2)
Open cover of MTR Up.
(3)
Inspect cover gaskets for deterioration.
5 -- 9
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.3
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 10kW -- X--BAND 6ft. SYSTEM
This chapter describes the preventive maintenance action to be performed at
scheduled intervals in order to guarantee continuous and maximum availability
of the pedestal.
Table 5--1 contains step--by--step description of the procedure, time required to
perform the operation, tools and instruments necessary to accomplish the task
and safety precautions.
Time intervals for maintenance are marked as listed below.
NOTE
During normal operating conditions as well as maintenance the
antenna rotation can be stopped by setting the safety switch to the
OFF position.
5.3.1
Maintenance Pre-- condition
NOTE
Before attempting any operations listed in Table 5--1, mains must
be disconnected from the pedestal.
3749DOC020302
5 -- 10
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.3.2
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
List Instrumentation and Tools for Maintenance
Special Tools;
-- silicone grease
-- metallic brush
-- metal wire with section 2 mm2
-- Socket wrench 13 mm
5.3.3
Preventive Maintenance
The Table 5--1 lists all maintenance operations, periodicity, qualified personal
skill for maintenance operation, time required to perform maintenance operation
and notes.
Location
Periodicity
Procedure
Pedestal screws tightening
2 years
Check that nr. 4 M10 screws
of pedestal and nr. 4 M8
screws closing cover are well
tightened. If not, tighten them
with socket wrench 13 mm.
Pedestal inside
annually
Check that anti--condensing
hole is open. If it is clogged,
clean it with a 2mm2 metal
wire.
Anticondensing
Hole
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
5 -- 11
2years
Check that M8 bolts of RTM
plate are tightened. If not,
tighten them with a socket
wrench 13 mm
4years
Lubricate pedestal hinges,
seal and antenna mounting
base with silicon grease using
a brush.
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Location
Periodicity
Procedure
3years
Inspect gear for clearance and
abrasion
Motor brushes
annually
Check motor brushes, if less
than 4 mm in length replace
them ((chapter 4.2.2.14) (new
brush thickness is 10 mm.)).
Antenna and pedestal exterior
annually
The antenna and the pedestal
exterior should be washed
with fresh water.
Table 5--1 Scheduled maintenance operations
3749DOC020302
5 -- 12
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.4
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE - PROCESSOR UNIT This chapter describes the preventive maintenance action to be performed at
scheduled intervals in order to guarantee continuous and maximum availability
of the NSC Display.
5.4.1
Cleaning the NSC Display
Clean the exterior of the Display, using a soft dampened with a mild cleaning
solution such as dish--washing detergent.
5.4.2
Changing the air filter
The front fan filter consists of a filter frame with a felt filter. This should regulary
(every 3 months) be cleaned.
To clean the filter, remove the filter cover by removing the four screws.
screws
filter
filter cover
Figure: 64 Processor Unit -- front side --
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
5 -- 13
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.5
PROCESSOR UNIT REMOVING AND CABLING
Cables routed to the processor unit and other units, must be properly supported
(see Connection Diagram 950--012.HP013).
NOTE
BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO CONNECT ANY SYSTEM CABLES OR
LINES, VERIFY THAT ALL POWER HAS BEEN TURNED OFF. REMOVE ANY FUSES AND/OR TAPE CIRCUIT BREAKERS TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL TURN ON. PLACE A SIGN ON THE POWER PANEL TO INFORM OTHERS THAT YOU ARE CONNECTING A SYSTEM.
CAUTION
ENSURE THAT THE CABLES ARE NOT CRIMPED OR
DAMAGED DURING INSTALLATION.
NOTE
Strip 30 inches of the outer insulation of the cables, and ground the shields
and drains to the clamps according to the interconnect diagram.
The processor unit has to be connect with an external cable set (board cable)
and with an internal cable set (computer cable set).
Before you start with this work, you have to remove the processor unit out of the
housing. Please follow the working steps (below).
3749DOC020302
5 -- 14
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
1. Remove the processor unit
Situation
left side
Processor unit
MARK
Housing edge
Mounting nut 10mm (width across), 2 pcs
Sliding plate
Opening in guide rail
Guide pin, 2 pcs
Guide rail
GND connection
Step.1
Loosen mounting nut 10mm (width across)
(do not unscrew)
Pull sliding plate FORWARD by abt. 2,5cm
until sliding plate can be lifted to the TOP.
Step.1
front side
Step.2
Step.2
left side
Radar housing until the MARK (2) is
reached.
7 and 6
Take sliding plate as far as possible (see
drawing), lift slightly and pull it out of the
Make sure that MARK and HOUSING
EDGE are congruent.
6 and 7
The opening of the guide rail and the
guide pins (7) are now congruent.
Now the sliding plate can be lifted and
taken out of the housing.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
5 -- 15
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Step.3
Step.3
Connect the external board cable.
See CONNECTION DIAGRAM 950--012.HP013
1 Guide rail
2 Processor unit cable set
3 Connection unit
(the picture can differ from the deliveries)
Figure: 65 Radar housing, open
3749DOC020302
5 -- 16
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Step.4
Trackball
Dongle
VGA 1
Com 3--6 Com 7--10
GND
230V AC
Keyboard
Step.4
Com 1
VGA 2
Accessory Relais PCB
Connect the computer cable set
Figure: 66 Processor unit, connection side
Step.5
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Step.5
DON‘T FORGET THE GND CONNETION
Place the sliding plate with the Processor unit into
the Radar housing in the reverse order.
Fasten mounting nuts (4).
5 -- 17
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.6
CHARTRADAR AND C--MAP eTOKEN REPLACING
The eToken is a special License Dongle for C--MAP chart data access.
The License Dongle is integrated in the computer (delivery status).
NOTE
The eToken from the defective computer has to be inserted into the replaced one.
The eToken Setup has to be executed after the new computer or a new
hard disk has been installed.
Do not plug in the eToken until you are prompted to insert the eToken during the Setup.
Fig eToken muß noch gemacht werden.
3749DOC020302
5 -- 18
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.6.1
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
C--MAP License Data
The C--Map 93/3 charts still need licenses for all machine individually!
This license is generated from the primary ID only!
The Alt Sys ID is the one from the chart server!
Explorer
Open ChartInstaller
Folder and select
the
ResetLic.exe file
Figure: 67 Select the Reset License
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
5 -- 19
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.6.2
C--MAP eToken C--Setup
NOTE
The eToken Setup has to be executed after the new computer or a new
hard disk has been installed.
Do not plug in the eToken until you are prompted to insert the
eToken during the Setup.
1 Required Software
Windows 2000 Professionel Service Pack 4.
The PROG0136 ”C--MAP ETOKEN SETUP” contains all necessary drivers
and software modules.
2 BIOS Settings
Enter the BIOS setup and ensure that the on board USB controller are
enabled.
3 Windows Hardware detection and Driver Setup
After enabling the USB ports in the BIOS, Windows 2000 will detect the USB
controller as new hardware. Insert the CD containing PROG0136 and follow
the instructions to install the driver. Specify to search for drivers on the
W2000_USB directory of the CD.
4 eToken Setup
After the driver setup completed run the ETSetup.exe application from the eT
Setup directory of the CD. This program will install the specific drivers for the
eToken.
Ensure that no eToken is plugged into the system.
It might be necessary to reboot the system to complete the installation.
3749DOC020302
5 -- 20
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
Press to Yes to reboot.
After the reboot the ETSetup.exe has to be started again in order to complete
the setup.
Wait until you are prompted to insert the eToken.
and then plug the eToken into an USB port.
Wait until Windows indicates that the new hardware ”eToken Pro 4254” has
been found.
Proceed with OK.
If the eToken Setup detects a previous C MAP SDK installation the following
message will be displayed.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
5 -- 21
3749DOC020302
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Press Yes to reinitialize the licenses. All existing C--MAP licenses will become
invalid and have to be renewed.
5 Changing the eToken
If the eToken has to been changed after the installation, the eTSetup has to
be run again in order to reinitialize. The eTSetup can be run from the ECDIS
directory.
6 Uninstalling the eToken
Run the ResetLic.exe from the ChartInstaller directory and edit the Company
Name in the License Data to Raytheon DE and System ID to the original
5--digit C--MAP ID of the system. Press Reset License to commit the changes.
The newly created user.usr file has to be sent to C--MAP in order to receive
new licenses.
3749DOC020302
5 -- 22
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
5.7
SPARE PARTS
5.7.1
Note on Ordering
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
To ensure fast processing of replacement parts orders the following details are
required:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Name the ship
Device type (refer to type label)
Exact designation of the replacement part from the
specifications given in the replacement parts catalogue.
Required number of part
5 -- 23
3749DOC020302
Radar NSC25 TFT-TT
Type 900-011.NG001
ANSCHÜTZ
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
10
14.622
Radar NSC25 TFT-TT
Type 900-011.NG001
Pos. Lager-Nr.
Stock-No.
4001665
ANSCHÜTZ
Benennung
Designation
NSC-Processor Radar
NSC-Processor Radar
Zeichnungs-Nr.
Part-No.
900-018.NG001
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
Stck. Herst.-Code Versorgungs-Nr.
Qty. MFRC
NSN
D2865
4002093
3608223
NSC-Processor Radar, NSC-Processor Radar, 900-018.NG001 AT
AT
reconditioned
Spare Parts TFT
Spare Parts TFT
900-015.X01
D2865
1721163
Taster
Pusbutton Switch
49-59111
C6913
1721220
C7249
1791302
Reset Pusbutton
Switch
Buzzer Module
9533CD-0
Drucktaster
Subminiatur
Hupenmodul
00990213
D2865
1791301
VGA Splitter
VGA Splitter
00109091
D2865
1505333
Trackball 50mm NSC
Trackball 50mm NSC
948-001.NG004
D2865
1503909
Radar Operator Panel
Radar Operator Panel
948-002.NG001 E05
D2865
4001855
D2865
1505496
Radar Connection
Module NSC
Fan
948-008.NG001
10
Radar Anschlußmodul
NSC
Lüfter
NB 24-021.00-016
D2865
D2865
für weitere Details: siehe separaten Ersatzteilkatalog
for further details see separate spare parts catalogue
All depicted items which are not mentioned in the text are not applicable for this unit. Since further development may necessitate making modifications to existing
equipment, its conformity with the relevant illustrations and drawings is not always ensured. Raytheon Marine will be under no liability whatever that may arise from any
such differences.
14.622 RA/S-SU 0503 EDITION 01
Radar NSC34 TFT-DS
Type 900-012.NG004
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
ANSCHÜTZ
14.621
Radar NSC34 TFT-DS
Type 900-012.NG004
Pos. Lager-Nr.
Stock-No.
4001665
ANSCHÜTZ
Benennung
Designation
NSC-Processor Radar
NSC-Processor Radar
Zeichnungs-Nr.
Part-No.
900-018.NG001
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
Stck. Herst.-Code Versorgungs-Nr.
Qty. MFRC
NSN
D2865
4002093
3608277
NSC-Processor Radar, NSC-Processor Radar, 900-018.NG001 AT
AT
reconditioned
Spare Parts TFT
Spare Parts TFT
900-021.X01
D2865
1721163
Taster
Pushbutton Switch
49-59111
C6913
1721220
C7249
1791302
Reset Pushbutton
Switch
Buzzer Module
9533CD-0
Drucktaster
Subminiatur
Hupenmodul
00990213
D2865
1791301
VGA Splitter
VGA Splitter
00109091
D2865
1505333
Trackball 50mm NSC
Trackball 50mm NSC
948-001.NG004
D2865
1503909
Radar Operator Panel
Radar Operator Panel
948-002.NG001 E05
D2865
4001855
Radar Anschlußmodul
NSC
Radar Connection
Module NSC
948-008.NG001
D2865
D2865
für weitere Details: siehe separaten Ersatzteilkatalog
for further details see separate spare parts catalogue
All depicted items which are not mentioned in the text are not applicable for this unit. Since further development may necessitate making modifications to existing
equipment, its conformity with the relevant illustrations and drawings is not always ensured. Raytheon Marine will be under no liability whatever that may arise from any
such differences.
14.621 RA/S-SU 0503 EDITION 01
Radar NSC34 TFT-TT
Type 900-012.NG001
ANSCHÜTZ
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
14.620
Radar NSC34 TFT-TT
Type 900-012.NG001
Pos. Lager-Nr.
Stock-No.
4001665
ANSCHÜTZ
Benennung
Designation
NSC-Processor Radar
NSC-Processor Radar
Zeichnungs-Nr.
Part-No.
900-018.NG001
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
Stck. Herst.-Code Versorgungs-Nr.
Qty. MFRC
NSN
D2865
4002093
3608277
NSC-Processor Radar, NSC-Processor Radar, 900-018.NG001 AT
AT
reconditioned
Spare Parts TFT
Spare Parts TFT
900-021.X01
D2865
1721163
Taster
Pushbutton Switch
49-59111
C6913
1721220
C7249
1791302
Reset Pusbutton
Switch
Buzzer Module
9533CD-0
Drucktaster
Subminiatur
Hupenmodul
00990213
D2865
1791301
VGA Splitter
VGA Splitter
00109091
D2865
1505333
Trackball 50mm NSC
Trackball 50mm NSC
948-001.NG004
D2865
1503909
Radar Operator Panel
Radar Operator Panel
948-002.NG001 E05
D2865
4001855
Radar Anschlußmodul
NSC
Radar Connection
Module NSC
948-008.NG001
D2865
D2865
für weitere Details: siehe separaten Ersatzteilkatalog
for further details see separate spare parts catalogue
All depicted items which are not mentioned in the text are not applicable for this unit. Since further development may necessitate making modifications to existing
equipment, its conformity with the relevant illustrations and drawings is not always ensured. Raytheon Marine will be under no liability whatever that may arise from any
such differences.
14.620 RA/S-SU 0503 EDITION 01
MK2 MTR Down 25kW 115/230V
Type G624938-1 E01 (M28353 E01)
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
ANSCHÜTZ
(F1)
11
(F5)
11
10
(F1)
(F4)
14
15
16
17
12
19
18
13
14.667
1 of 2
MK2 MTR Down 25kW 115/230V
Type G624938-1 E01 (M28353 E01)
Pos. Lager-Nr. Benennung
Stock-No.
4001704 MK2 X-MTR down
25 kW 115/230V 1 Ph,
neu
4001920 MK2 X-MTR down
25 kW 115/230 1Ph,
AT
21 3610092 Service Mosfet Housing
Assy
31 1790618 DC/DC Wandler
150/300V 20A 100W
3609990 MK2-Modulator PCB,
neu
3610135 MK2-Modulator PCB,
AT
1760024 Sub-Miniatursicherung
2,5A 250V
3601131 MK2 Local Control PCB
Assy
1760041 G-Sicherungseinsatz
F7A 250V
3603628 MK2 Power Input &
I/O PCB, neu
3605133 MK2 Power Input &
I/O PCB, AT
3605199 MK2 Controller PCB,
neu
3609608 MK2 Controller PCB,
AT
10 1760022 Sub-Miniatursicherung
1A 250V
11 1760021 Sub-Miniatursicherung
0,5A 250V
12 1503051 C/A Cont to I/F PCB
Designation
MK2 X-MTR down
25 kW 115/230 1Ph,
brandnew
MK2 X-MTR down
25 kW 115/230 1Ph,
reconditioned
Service Mosfet Housing
Assy
DC/DC Converter
150/300V 20A 100W
MK2-Modulator PCB,
brandnew
MK2-Modulator PCB,
reconditioned
Sub-Miniature Fuse
2,5A 250V
MK2 Local Control PCB
Assy
Fuse
F7A 250V
MK2 Power Input &
I/O PCB, brandnew
MK2 Power Input &
I/O PCB, reconditioned
MK2 Controller PCB,
brandnew
MK2 Controller PCB,
reconditioned
Sub-Miniature Fuse
1A 250V
Sub-Miniature Fuse
0,5A 250V
C/A Cont to I/F PCB
ANSCHÜTZ
Zeichnungs-Nr.
Part-No.
G624938-1 E01
Stck. Herst.-Code Versorgungs-Nr.
Qty. MFRC
NSN
D2865
G624938-1 E01 AT
D2865
G627215.X01
D2865
VI-272-CW
G626035-1
G624200-1 E03 ET
D2865
D2865
G624200-1 E03 AT
D2865
D2865
312007
G624197-1ET
G624197-1AT
5920-00-884-2724
D2865
D2865
G624194-3 AT
D2865
D2865
PCC-1
G623510-3
PCC-1/2
G623510-1
G624682-2
D2865
D2865
D2865
13
3601960
Lüfter, kompl.
Fan, compl.
G623588-1
D2865
14
3609956
D2865
1790939
D2865
1502768
B3JC1649
G624373-1
G261088-2
16
X-Band RF MTR
Assembly
3 Port Circulator,
X-Band
Circulator, 3 Port
G625145-1 E01 ET
15
X-Band RF MTR
Assembly
3 Port Circulator,
X-Band
Circulator, 3 Port
D2865
17
1791666
Limiter, two Stage,
X-Band
LNFE Sub Assy,
X-Pedestal, neu
LNFE Sub Assy,
X-Pedestal, AT
Magnetron, X-Band,
9410MHz, 25kW
Limiter, two Stage,
X-Band
LNFE Sub Assy,
X-Pedestal, brandnew
LNFE Sub Assy,
X-Pedestal, recond.
Magnetron, X-Band,
9410MHz, 25kW
TL 393
D2865
G624499-1 ET
D2865
3604956
18
19
3603870
1730480
G624499-1 AT
MG5424
G624375-3
hinter der Modulator PCB montiert
mounted behind the Modulator PCB
bei Austausch eines LNFE Sub Assembly muss unbedingt auch der Limiter getauscht werden
if a LNFE Sub Assembly has to be replaced it is mandatory to change the limiter too
5840-01-454-6947
D2865
PCC-2 1/2
G623510-6
G624241-1
G624194-3ET
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
D2865
D2865
5960-99-327-4144
All depicted items which are not mentioned in the text are not applicable for this unit. Since further development may necessitate making modifications to existing
equipment, its conformity with the relevant illustrations and drawings is not always ensured. Raytheon Anschütz will be under no liability whatever that may arise
from any such differences.
14.667 RAN/ST-SU 0710 EDITION 01
2 of 2
MK2 X-MTR Pedestal 25kW 115/230V 1Ph
Type G624364-1 E01 (M28347 E01)
ANSCHÜTZ
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
(100)
100
10
11
13
(F1)
(F4)
(F5)
12
100
(Schrauben,
Scheiben und
O-Ringe; srews,
washers and
rubber gaskets)
17
14
16
beachte Fußnoten;
pay attention to the
footnotes
15
14.666
1 of 4
MK2 X-MTR Pedestal 25kW 115/230V 1Ph
Type G624364-1 E01 (M28347 E01)
ANSCHÜTZ
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
22
20
19
21
24
25
23
(F1)
18
28
27
(100)
26
Winkel Part A;
Hinge Part A
29
14.666
2 of 4
MK2 X-MTR Pedestal 25kW 115/230V 1Ph
Type G624364-1 E01 (M28347 E01)
Pos. Lager-Nr. Benennung
Stock-No.
4001708 MK2 X_MTR Pedestal
25 kW 115/220 1Ph,
neu
4001918 MK2 X_MTR Pedestal
25 kW 115/220 1Ph,
AT
3610139 Tür, Controller PCB
3605199
1760021
1760022
1502441
1503064
MK2 Controller PCB,
neu
MK2 Controller PCB,
AT
Sub-Miniatursicherung
0,5A 250V
Sub-Miniatursicherung
1A 250V
Gasket-Side Cover
Ped.
C/A Cont to I/F PCB
1791529
Encoder
1502720
10
1760037
11
1760041
12
1780389
13
1990061
3609608
3604960
141,2
3609384
3604956
14
1,3
3603870
15
1791666
16
1790939
17
1730480
18
1670153
19
1790932
20
1670151
Designation
MK2 X_MTR Pedestal
25 kW 115/220 1Ph,
brandnew
MK2 X_MTR Pedestal
25 kW 115/220 1Ph,
reconditioned
Door with controller
PCB
MK2 Controller PCB,
brandnew
MK2 Controller PCB,
reconditioned
Sub-Miniature Fuse
0,5A 250V
Sub-Miniature Fuse
1A 250V
Gasket-Side Cover
Ped.
C/A Cont to I/F PCB
Zeichnungs-Nr.
Part-No.
G624364-1 E01
D2865
148-500.52 ET
D2865
G624194-3ET
D2865
G624194-3 AT
D2865
PCC-1/2
G623510-1
PCC-1
G623510-3
G624045-1
D2865
D2865
D2865
G624682-1
D2865
Encoder
ITD 11B10Y4
D2865
Lüfterrad d=156,4mm
Fanwheel d=156,4mm
167279-1
D2865
G-Sicherungseinsatz
8A 250V
G-Sicherungseinsatz
F7A 250V
Power-Relais
12V DC 2 Wechsler
Trockenbeutel
Fuse
8A 250V
Fuse
F7A 250V
Relay 12V DC
MDA 8
D2865
312007
D2865
KUHP-11D51-12
G625460-11
NFH 00321
D2865
D2865
LNFE Sub Assy,
X-Pedestal, neu
LNFE Sub Assy,
X-Pedestal, AT
LNFE Sub Assy,
X-Pedestal, neu
LNFE Sub Assy,
X-Pedestal, AT
Limiter, two Stage,
X-Band
3 Port Circulator,
X-Band
Magnetron, X-Band,
9410MHz, 25kW
Zahnriemenscheibe 2
LNFE Sub Assy,
X-Pedestal, brandnew
LNFE Sub Assy,
X-Pedestal, recond.
LNFE Sub Assy,
X-Pedestal, brandnew
LNFE Sub Assy,
X-Pedestal, recond.
Limiter, two Stage,
X-Band
3 Port Circulator,
X-Band
Magnetron, X-Band,
9410MHz, 25kW
Toothed belt disk 2
148-500.45 ET
D2865
Motor 115/208-220V
AC
Zahnriemen 24“
Motor 115/208-220V
AC
Toothed Belt 24”
Air drying bag
148-500.45 AT
G624499-1 ET
D2865
D2865
TL 393
D2865
B3JC1649
G624373-1
MG5424
G624375-3
7813-0224
G626119-66
114885.00
G624189-1
240J6
G626119-115
D2865
D2865
D2865
D2865
D2865
in Pedestal G624364-1 E01
in Pedestal G624364-1 E00
5920-00-884-2724
D2865
G624499-1 AT
bei Austausch eines LNFE Sub Assembly muss unbedingt auch der Limiter getauscht werden
if a LNFE Sub Assembly has to be replaced it is mandatory to change the limiter too
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
Stck. Herst.-Code Versorgungs-Nr.
Qty. MFRC
NSN
D2865
G624364-1 E01 AT
14.666
ANSCHÜTZ
5960-99-327-4144
3030-01-163-8587
3 of 4
MK2 X-MTR Pedestal 25kW 115/230V 1Ph
Type G624364-1 E01 (M28347 E01)
Pos. Lager-Nr. Benennung
Stock-No.
21 1670152 Zahnriemenscheibe 6”
22
3609540
3609990
23
3610135
24
1760024
254
1790618
264
3610092
27
3604763
3603628
28
295
3605133
3604978
1006 3610200
Designation
Toothed belt disk 6“
Tür, Modulator PCB
Door with Modulator
PCB
MK2-Modulator PCB,
MK2-Modulator PCB,
neu
brandnew
MK2-Modulator PCB,
MK2-Modulator PCB,
AT
reconditioned
Sub-Miniatursicherung Sub-Miniature Fuse
2,5A 250V
2,5A 250V
DC/DC Wandler
DC/DC Converter
150/300V 20A 100W
150/300V 20A 100W
Service Mosfet Housing Service Mosfet Housing
Assy
Assy
Zusatzlüfter,
Fan,
Modulator X-Band
Modulator X-Band
MK2 Power Input &
MK2 Power Input &
I/O PCB, neu
I/O PCB, brandnew
MK2 Power Input &
MK2 Power Input &
I/O PCB, AT
I/O PCB, reconditioned
Tür, leer
Door, empty
Satz Kleinteile für Tür
MK2
Set of small parts for
door MK2
Zeichnungs-Nr.
Part-No.
7813-6600
G626119-83
148-500.51 ET
G624200-1 E03 ET
ANSCHÜTZ
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
Stck. Herst.-Code Versorgungs-Nr.
Qty. MFRC
NSN
D2865
D2865
D2865
G624200-1 E03 AT
D2865
PCC-2 1/2
G623510-6
VI-272-CW
G626035-1
G627215.X01
D2865
D2865
D2865
148-500.47
D2865
G624197-1ET
D2865
G624197-1AT
D2865
148-500.53
D2865
148-500.X52
D2865
hinter der Modulator PCB montiert
mounted behind the Modulator PCB
ohne PCB´s, jedoch mit Schrauben, Scheiben, Türdichtung und Winkel Part A
without PCB´s, but incl. Screws, washers, gasket und hinge part A
bestehend aus: Schrauben, Scheiben, O-Ringen, Türdichtungen und Winkel Part A und Part B für zwei Türen
consisting of: screws, washers, rubber gaskets, gaskets for the doors and hinges part A and part B for 2 doors.
5840-01-454-6947
All depicted items which are not mentioned in the text are not applicable for this unit. Since further development may necessitate making modifications to existing
equipment, its conformity with the relevant illustrations and drawings is not always ensured. Raytheon Anschütz will be under no liability whatever that may arise
from any such differences.
14.666 RAN/ST-SU 0710 EDITION 01
4 of 4
6ft Antenna with
10 kW X-Band Pedestal
Type AU11-06NR / SU70-10NR
ANSCHÜTZ
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
Rückansicht / rear view
10
11
14.641 RAN/ST-SU 0903 EDITION 03
1 of 2
6ft Antenna with
10 kW X-Band Pedestal
Type AU11-06NR / SU70-10NR
Pos. Lager-Nr.
Stock-No.
1 2808251
ANSCHÜTZ
Benennung
Designation
2808390
Radar Antenne 6ft
X-Band
Pedestal 10kW X-Band,
22RPM, neu
Pedestal 10kW X-Band,
22RPM, AT
RTM Plate, neu
6ft X-Band Antenna
array
Pedestal 10kW X-Band, SU70-10NR
22RPM, new
Pedestal 10kW X-Band, SU70-10NR AT
22RPM, reconditioned
RTM Plate, new
AA032913
2808391
RTM Plate, AT
AA032913
1791423
Modulator Module
RTM Plate,
reconditioned
Modulator Module
MDL-301
D2865
1730654
Motor Control Module
Motor Control Module
ACP-30020
D2865
1730655
Magnetron
Magnetron
EV055062
D2865
1791426
Front End
Front End
EX060902
D2865
1791424
Limiter
Limiter
EX042952
D2865
1791428
Circulator
Circulator
EX070102
D2865
10
1730653
Antenna Motor Group
Antenna Motor Group
GM046
D2865
11
1791429
Bürste
Brush
EE 181702
D2865
2808250
2808417
Zeichnungs-Nr.
Part-No.
AU11-U6NR
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
Stck. Herst.-Code Versorgungs-Nr.
Qty. MFRC
NSN
D2865
D2865
D2865
D2865
D2865
All depicted items which are not mentioned in the text are not applicable for this unit. Since further development may necessitate making modifications to existing
equipment, its conformity with the relevant illustrations and drawings is not always ensured. Raytheon Anschütz will be under no liability whatever that may arise
from any such differences.
14.641 RAN/ST-SU 0903 EDITION 03
2 of 2
NSC Transceiver Control Unit
Type 900-019.NG001
ANSCHÜTZ
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
Pos. Lager-Nr.
Stock-No.
1 4001700
4002227
1730493
3609787
3609785
1791446
Benennung
Designation
NSC Transceiver
Control Unit, neu
NSC Transceiver
Control Unit, AT
Netzfilter
NSC Transceiver
Control Unit, new
NSC Transceiver
Control Unit, recond.
Filter
DC/DC Wandler
24V / ±12V
Transceiver Control
Module PCB
AC/DC Wandler 10A
DC/DC Converter
24V / ±12V
Transceiver Control
Module PCB
AC/DC Converter 10A
Zeichnungs-Nr.
Part-No.
900-019.NG001
Stck. Herst.-Code Versorgungs-Nr.
Qty. MFRC
NSN
D2865
900-019.NG001 AT
D2865
6A 250V AC / 50Hz
6VN1
900-019.21 ET
D2865
D2865
900-019.100 ET
D2865
6EP1 334-3BA
00P62
All depicted items which are not mentioned in the text are not applicable for this unit. Since further development may necessitate making modifications to existing
equipment, its conformity with the relevant illustrations and drawings is not always ensured. Raytheon Anschütz will be under no liability whatever that may arise
from any such differences.
14.627 RA/ST-SU 0602 EDITION 03
R
NSC Radar
Service and Installation Manual
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
3749DOC020302
Radar Computer (Chart Radar)
Type 950-012.NG006
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
ANSCHÜTZ
14.677 RAN/ST-SU 0903 EDITION 01
1 of 2
Radar Computer (Chart Radar)
Type 950-012.NG006
Pos. Lager-Nr.
Stock-No.
1 3610192
ANSCHÜTZ
Benennung
Designation
Radar Computer
Radar Computer
Zeichnungs-Nr.
Part-No.
950-012.NG006
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
Stck. Herst.-Code Versorgungs-Nr.
Qty. MFRC
NSN
D2865
2600133
Floppy 1,44 MB
Floppy 1,44 MB
FD235HF-D291
D2865
3609923
Serial I/O-PCB
Serial I/O-PCB
900-010.22 E01 ET
D2865
3610267
Radar-Interface Chart
Radar-Interface Chart
900-014.117 E01 AT
D2865
1791916
D2865
1791914
Graphic PCB
Matrox P650
Power Supply
150009
Grafikkarte
Matrox P650
Netzteil
1000955
D2865
1791919
DVD-Laufwerk
DVD Drive
1000648
D2865
3610432
Hard Drive Kit
Hard Drive Kit
950-012.X01
D2865
7025-12-374-1583
All depicted items which are not mentioned in the text are not applicable for this unit. Since further development may necessitate making modifications to existing
equipment, its conformity with the relevant illustrations and drawings is not always ensured. Raytheon Anschütz will be under no liability whatever that may arise
from any such differences.
14.677 RAN/ST-SU 0903 EDITION 01
2 of 2
Radar Computer
Type 950-012.NG007
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
ANSCHÜTZ
14.678 RAN/ST-SU 0903 EDITION 01
1 of 2
Radar Computer
Type 950-012.NG007
Pos. Lager-Nr.
Stock-No.
1 3610193
ANSCHÜTZ
Benennung
Designation
Radar Computer
Radar Computer
Zeichnungs-Nr.
Part-No.
950-012.NG007
Ersatzteilkatalog
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
Stck. Herst.-Code Versorgungs-Nr.
Qty. MFRC
NSN
D2865
2600133
Floppy 1,44 MB
Floppy 1,44 MB
FD235HF-D291
D2865
3609923
Serial I/O-PCB
Serial I/O-PCB
900-010.22 E01 ET
D2865
3610103
Radar-Interface
Radar-Interface
900-014.114 E02 AT
D2865
1791914
Netzteil
Power Supply
1000955
D2865
1791919
DVD-Laufwerk
DVD Drive
1000648
D2865
3610432
Hard Drive Kit
Hard Drive Kit
950-012.X01
D2865
7025-12-374-1583
All depicted items which are not mentioned in the text are not applicable for this unit. Since further development may necessitate making modifications to existing
equipment, its conformity with the relevant illustrations and drawings is not always ensured. Raytheon Anschütz will be under no liability whatever that may arise
from any such differences.
14.678 RAN/ST-SU 0903 EDITION 01
2 of 2
NSC 25 / 34
RADAR
Service and Installation Manual
Installation Protocol
o.k. CP. /
WORK
Example
chap.
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
(see CP... in chapter 3)
Display
Display
A/C
B/D
XCVR1
XCVR2
XCVR1
XCVR2
RADAR UTILITY
26
Display Network
1.1.1.21
3.10
Display Resolution
1024x
768
Gyro Data Baud Rate
38400
RADAR
SERV Configuration,
Password ”test”
Done
Keyboard, Standard
Done
Transceiver quantity
Two
Transceiver Port IN
Primary
Display quantity
Two
Display ID
Interswitch used for this
XCVR?
Yes/No
Interswitch Unit Port IN
ISU
Primary
File Exit
EXIT RADAR
RADAR
Done
SERV, Configuration,
Password ”test”
Done
User Select M (Master) or M
S (Slave)
TRANSCEIVER TYP
MK2/NSC
TRANSCEIVER TYP
SCANNER
TCM +
10kW
MK2 PMU INSTALLED
Yes/No
7,8,9 FOR TCM/TCU SET ID
2,3,4
EXENDED GAIN
No
RRB AVAILABLE
No
10
FINISHED
Done
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Finish -- 1
3749DOC020302
NSC 25 / 34
RADAR
Service and Installation Manual
Installation Protocol (see CP... in chapter 3)
o.k. CP. /
WORK
Example
chap.
Display
Display
A/C
B/D
XCVR1
XCVR2
XCVR1
XCVR2
File Exit
EXIT RADAR
RADAR
Done
SERV, Configuration,
Password ”test”
Done
User Select M (Master) or M
VIDEO LEVELS
11
Level
408
SERV, Configuration,
Password ”test”
12
LABEL (optional 7 letter
for User)
Helicop
12
ANTENNA HEIGHT
34
12
PEDESTAL FWD/AFT
POSITION
12
TRANSMISSION LINE
LENGTH
--6
12
TRANSMISSION LINE
LENGTH
22
12
ANTENNA RATE
21
14
ZERO RANGE
1.46
15
ANTENNA AZIMUTH
OFFSET
1657
16
TUNING PRESET
128
17
NOISE LEVELS
Done
18
SECTOR BLANKING
Done
PMU CALIBRATION
Done
PMU REVIEW VALUES
TX4,RX15
FINISHED
Notes
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Finish -- 2
3749DOC020302
NSC 25 / 34
RADAR
Service and Installation Manual
Installation Protocol
o.k. CP. /
WORK
Example
chap.
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
(see CP... in chapter 3)
Display
Display
A/C
B/D
XCVR1
XCVR2
XCVR1
XCVR2
USER PREFS
19
DEFAULT PULSE WIDTH SHORT
0.75
19
DEFAULT PULSE WIDTH SHORT
1.50
19
HEADING LINE
19
CURVED HEADING LINE DISABLE
20
LOST TARGET
CANCEL
20
AUTO ACQUIRE
0.25
20NM
20
LENGTH
150
20
WIDTH
25
20
(BOW FROM) CRP X
OFFSET)
20
(BOW FROM) CRP Y
OFFSET)
125
20
CFAR ENABLED
Yes
E0010
SOLID
SHADOW SECTORS RE- Yes
CORDED
REFLECTION SECTORS Yes
RECORDED
CALIBRATION PMU RECORDED
Yes
File Exit
Done
EXIT RADAR
Done
RADAR
Done
SERV, Configuration,
Password ”test”
Done
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Finish -- 3
3749DOC020302
NSC 25 / 34
RADAR
Service and Installation Manual
Installation Protocol (see CP... in chapter 3)
o.k. CP. /
WORK
Example
chap.
Display
Display
A/C
B/D
COM_PORTS
21,
23
COM1 Device type
AIS (Auto)
24
COM1 LABEL
n/a
24
COM1 BITS bps PARITY
8,38400,N
24
POS OFFSET FROM
CRP X,Y
0,0
24
INPUT SENTENCES
n/a
21,
23
COM12 Device type
DGPS
24
COM12 LABEL
AP12
24
COM12 BITS bps PARITY 8,4800,N
24
POS OFFSET FROM
CRP X,Y
--5,3
24
INPUT SENTENCES
GLL, VTG,
ROUTE
21,
23
COM13/16 Device type
LOG &
VDR out
24
COM13/16 LABEL
SAL
24
COM13/16 BITS bps
PARITY
8,4800,N
24
POS OFFSET FROM
CRP X,Y
0,120
24
INPUT SENTENCES
VBW
25
OUTPUT SENTENCES
TTM,OSD,
RSD
21,
23
COM14/17 Device type
ARCP
(Auto)
24
COM14/17 LABEL
ARCP
24
COM14/17 BITS bps
PARITY
8,4800,N
24
POS OFFSET FROM
CRP X,Y
n/a
24
INPUT SENTENCES
n/a
25
OUTPUT SENTENCES
n/a
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Finish -- 4
3749DOC020302
NSC 25 / 34
RADAR
Service and Installation Manual
Installation Protocol
o.k. CP. /
WORK
Example
chap.
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
(see CP... in chapter 3)
Display
Display
A/C
B/D
DIV IN/OUT
22
GYRO COM 11
Course
Bus
22
UPLINK COM 15
Yes
22
PULSE LOG
OFF
ETHERNET
27,
28
AIS Server
This Display
27,
28
IP Address
127.0.0.1
27,
28
IP Port
5000
27
AIS ON/OFF
ON
LAN1
Other Device Type
Raytheon
ECDIS1
TRANSMIT IP (Other De- 1.1.1.1
vice listen)
TRANSMIT IP Port (Other 5101 (disp
Device)
A)
RECEIVE from other IP
Address
1.1.1.1
RECEIVE from other IP
Port
5001
INPUT SENTENCES
POS,ROU
TE,CHT
OUTPUT SENTENCES
TTM,OSD,
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Finish -- 5
3749DOC020302
NSC 25 / 34
RADAR
Service and Installation Manual
Installation Protocol (see CP... in chapter 3)
o.k. CP. /
WORK
Example
chap.
Display
Display
A/C
B/D
LAN2
Other Device Type
Raytheon
ECDIS2
TRANSMIT IP (Other De- 1.1.1.2
vice listen)
TRANSMIT IP Port (Other 5101 (for
Device)
disp A)
RECEIVE from other IP
Address
1.1.1.2
RECEIVE from other IP
Port
5001
INPUT SENTENCES
CURSOR
OUTPUT SENTENCES
CURSOR
LAN3
Other Device Type
TRANSMIT IP (Other Device listen)
TRANSMIT IP Port (Other
Device)
RECEIVE from other IP
Address
RECEIVE from other IP
Port
INPUT SENTENCES
OUTPUT SENTENCES
File Exit
EXIT RADAR
RADAR
*****OPERATE ALL INTERFACES****
OK
SERV, Configuration,
Password ”test”
29
5. SAVE
29
SAVE BACKUP OF ALL
WORK
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
26 Jan 05
Finish -- 6
3749DOC020302
NSC 25 / 34
RADAR
Service and Installation Manual
Installation Protocol
o.k. CP. /
WORK
Example
chap.
29
YES--NOW
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
(see CP... in chapter 3)
Display
Display
A/C
B/D
Display
Display
A/C
B/D
Your Signatur
Date:
Name:
Service Support Company:
o.k. CP.
WORK
Example
chap.
Make USB stick with
:\RAYTHEON
Done
RADAR UTILITY
3.9.1 Service Report Export to
USB
Copy to PC before making another
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Done
wehresmann
@raykiel.com
Finish -- 7
3749DOC020302
NSC 25 / 34
RADAR
Service and Installation Manual
Installation Protocol (see CP... in chapter 3)
AHEAD
360_
RED
337.5_
GREEN
22.5_
315_
45_
292.5_
67.5_
270_
90_
247,5_
112.5_
225_
RED
135_
202.5_
157.5_
GREEN
180_
Blank Sectors (not transmitted)
Sector Start
Sector End
Reflector Sectors (mast, funnel, w’house)
Sector Start
Sector End
PMU calibration Sector
New Magnetron Date
GAIN full, start echo
GAIN full, end echo
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Finish -- 8
3749DOC020302
x
Pedestal screws tightening
X/S--Band check the gear box assembly lubricant level and use lubricants as
using the oil level sight gage (chapter 5.2.2)
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
X/S--Band drive system inspection (chapter 5.2.5)
Change the Air Drying Bag
X/S--Band pedestal lubricant draining (chapter 5.2.4)
M--Plan -- 1
X/S--Band cleaning and inspection (chapter 5.2.1)
MK2 Pedestal 25/30KW (X/S) & Array
Cleaning
Trackball & Operator Panel
Visual cable check (damaged cables ?)
all 12
Months
all 3
Months
Check all plug--in --, bolted--connections and clamped cables
Function test fan
Cleaning/Changing the air filter
-- Processor unit (chapter 5.4.2)
-- A320 processor see appendix doc. No. 3790
Cleaning the NSC Display
Processor Unit & TFT Display
Procedure
all 30
Months
Maintenance Plan for Radar and Chartradar NSC
Service and Installation Manual
3749DOC020302
Change the Air Drying Bag every time after
opening the pedestal.
Remarks
Raytheon Anschütz GmbH
Germany
M--Plan -- 2
Access cover gasket inspection (chapter 5.2.6)
Edition: 22.JAN.2009
Check ground connection
Maintenance Plan for Radar and Chartradar NSC
Service and Installation Manual
3749DOC020302

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : hmayer
Create Date                     : 2009:09:15 11:57:03+02:00
Modify Date                     : 2009:09:16 11:13:33+02:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.0.0 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Metadata Date                   : 2009:09:16 11:13:33+02:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Titel
Creator                         : hmayer
Document ID                     : uuid:be2e5e97-26f8-4f72-9ddb-9eac0f48a44c
Instance ID                     : uuid:6884d724-a15e-4c8c-a745-7de97f1b6449
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 330

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Raytheon Anschuetz High Seas 9RAN-SUR-25U Marine Radar User Manual Titel

Raytheon Anschuetz GmbH High Seas Products Marine Radar Titel

Service Manual

FCC ID Filing: ASL9RAN-SUR-25U

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation